Home

IBM 3000 Printer User Manual

1. HC60G082 Note To use the default temperature that is set during printer configuration ENTER 0 zero not the default temperature e SELECT the OK pushbutton e Print several hundred feet of forms at the new temperature e Check the fusing to see if it is acceptable If it is not repeat the procedure 150 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Poor Fusing Simplex Mode If poor fusing occurs on labels or heavy forms increase the preheat temperature in 5 increments until the fusing is acceptable Run several hundred feet of forms to stabilize the temperature Check the fusing to see if it is acceptable If the fusing is unacceptable increase the temperature by 5 and try printing again If adequate fusing does not occur the form may be unacceptable for use on the printers If the fusing is acceptable examine the printed forms in the stacker to verify that the sheets are not sticking together or that toner is not being pulled off adjacent sheets If either condition exists the form may be unacceptable for use on the printers Evaluate the condition of the printed forms and consider the following How long it took to print the job How long the forms were left in the stacker How much pressure was applied to the stack The type of application for which the forms are used for example bar code readability Forms Stick Together If forms stick together or toner is pull
2. HC60G071 1 Locate a new fine filter 2 From the rear of the printer open the rear center cover Chapter 7 Ordering and Replacing Supplies 201 HC60G006 3 Locate the latch on the filter cover and pull the latch up to open the filter housing 4 Pull the filter housing out until it is tilting toward you about 30 5 Remove the plastic bag from the new fine filter and place the fine filter on the floor 6 Slowly pull the old fine filter out of the filter housing and place it in the plastic bag from the new fine filter 7 Discard the used fine filter 8 Wipe the filter housing with a soft cloth to remove any debris 202 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide 10 11 12 13 HC60G072 Put the fine filter in the filter housing Ensure that the fine filter is completely in the filter housing Return the fine filter housing to its upright position in the recess Lower the filter cover and secure the latch Close the right rear cover of the printer To resume processing SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen If the CHECK FINE FILTER message appears the fine filter may not be pushed all the way into the filter housing Adjust the fine filter then repeat step La if that_does not correct the problem cont
3. IN 00 HC60G053 To change the volume on the printer operator alert assembly do the following 1 Locate the knob at the base of the operator alert assembly 2 To increase the volume turn the knob clockwise 3 To decrease the volume turn the knob counterclockwise 4 Test the alarm volume by opening the transfer assembly 5 Repeat steps 2 and BI until you have adjusted the volume to the desired level 74 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Advancing Forms Using the NPRO and NPRO Page Functions NPRO NonProcess RunOut moves forms forward through the forms path e In simplex mode NPRO moves the forms forward to the stacker area Forms are fused as they move toward the stacker area e In duplex mode NPRO moves forms forward through the forms path of Printer 1 the Buffer Flipper Unit and Printer 2 Pages that were printed on Printer 1 are printed on Printer 2 and Printer 1 processes blank pages After all pages are printed on Printer 2 the forms move forward through the forms path of both printers without printing until all pages printed on Printer 2 are in the stacker area Pages already printed on Printer 1 at the start of this procedure and pages printed on Printer 2 during this procedure are fused as they move toward their respective stacker areas The distance NPRO moves forms depends on your printer configuration There is a fixed NPRO length that you can increase with two differen
4. NWTO0147 10 Roll the upper roll down against the lower roll 11 Holding both rolls press the lower oiler belt roll to the right against the spring 12 Remove the lower oiler belt roll by removing the left end first 13 Place the old oiler belt on several thicknesses of absorbent material such as paper towels 14 Remove the new oiler belt from its carton saving the plastic bag for the old oiler belt m Operator Tip The oiler belt roll with the most material is the upper roll The notched end of the roll is the right side nearest the printer NWTO0148 Chapter 7 Ordering and Replacing Supplies 209 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Important When you install the oiler belt rolls you must line up the notches in the rolls with the tabs on the sprocket If you do not do this the oiler belt does not advance correctly This causes reduced print quality While you hold the upper larger roll against the lower roll do the following a Place the right end of the upper roll on the sprocket lining up the notches in the roll to the tabs on the sprocket Press the upper roll to the right against the spring b Place the left end of the upper roll on the sprocket and let the right spring loaded sprocket hold the roll in place Working with the lower roll repeat step E Note The oiler belt must be und
5. HC60G045 Forms length and width controls Stacker end cover Stacker table Finger belts Stacker gate open O uu F WO N me Stacker control panel Chapter 3 Functional Areas 27 Stacker Control Panel The stacker control panel is just above the stacker The controls allow you to raise and lower the stacker table stop the movement of the stacker table advance the forms and select the type of form being used The panel also indicates with lights the length of the forms being used which is set by the Forms Length Control see Forms Select DA 16 22 Ibs 51 71kg 60 82g O B 23 42 Ibs 72 135kg 83 157g OC Plastic Forms Length l l 1 l 1 l 1 l 1 l i l 1 Q Stop 1 1 1 l 1 l 1 l i o0 o o l HC60G004 Figure 2 Stacker Control Panel Using This Control Does This Makes the complete system both printers Ready when the printing system is in duplex mode or makes the individual printer Ready when the system is in dual simplex mode If pages are waiting to be printed and the system or printer is online to the READY host printing begins A09M0332 printing system both printers Not Ready in duplex mode or the Finishes the page that is currently being printed and makes the Q individual printer Not Ready in simplex mode
6. 286 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Table 30 SRC Messages continued Code Message Text Type Printer Error unless noted otherwise AF01 Attachment subsystem cannot create a file AF02 Attachment subsystem cannot open a file AF11 Attachment card present before last shutdown not found B000 The printer has been powered on or restarted B001 An attachment has been enabled B002 An attachment has been reset B003 Printer attributes have changed B004 MICR has been enabled B005 MICR has been disabled B006 Postprocessor enabled or disabled B007 Medium modifier changed B008 Stacker enabled or disabled B009 Print adjust has been entered BOOA Job has been canceled BOOC Printer has been made NOT READY BOOD Operator has overridden jam recovery BOOE Jam recovery has been suppressed B010 Attachment has been suspended B011 Attachment has been released from suspension B012 Paper path rethreaded BAOO Program check Type 1 BAO1 Program check Type 2 BA02 Program check Type 3 BC01 Invalid form size BC02 Invalid print head resolution BC03 Invalid form source BC04 Invalid maximum form size BC05 Memory configuration has changed BFO1 File read error hard disk BFO2 File write error hard disk BF03 Hard disk backup to diskette failure C000 Operator touch screen error C002 Microcode update diskett
7. How satisfied are you that the information in this book is Very Satisfied Satisfied Neutral Accurate Complete Easy to find Easy to understand Well organized OOOOUO Applicable to your tasks Please tell us how we can improve this book Thank you for your responses May we contact you Yes No Dissatisfied Dissatisfied Very Dissatisfied Very Dissatisfied When you send comments to IBM you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you Name Address Company or Organization Phone No Readers Comments We d Like to Hear from You 544 5564 01 Fold and Tape Please do not staple Fold and Tape IBM Corporation IBM Printing Systems Company Department H7FE Building 003G Information Development P O Box 1900 Boulder CO USA 80301 9817 PLACE POSTAGE STAMP HERE Fold and Tape 544 5564 01 Please do not staple Fold and Tape Cut or Fold Along Line Cut or Fold Along Line Part Number 63H6618 File Number S370 4300 9370 16__ Printed in U S A 544 5564 01 63H6618
8. 9 If a postprocessing device is installed and not threaded SELECT the Feed Forms pushbutton on the window as many times as necessary to advance the forms enough to thread the postprocessing device 10 SELECT the Completed pushbutton on the window This completes this type of Thread Align Forms procedure 11 To begin printing SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the main Display Touch Screen window Options Operate Thread Align Forms Print While Threading R Printer 1 Select No or Yes in the Print While No Feed Page Threading Field Configure Analyze Yes 7 Printer 2 Select Start to Start the Thread Align Feed Page Forms are Connected Feed Forms Mark is Start Completed Aligned HoR Forms Procedure Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job Print While Threading 1 SELECT the Yes option within the Print While Threading field 2 SELECT the Start pushbutton This informs the control unit to begin the thread align process 3 SELECT the Feed Forms pushbutton on the Thread Align Forms window a This prints a solid alignment mark after the leading edge on a page in Printer 1 which is designated as an alignment page A2300158 A one bar or two bar pattern is also printed on the alignment page The bar shows whether Side 1 or Side 2 of the form is being printed on Printer 160 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide This prints
9. HC60G091 Figure 23 Options Pull Down Menu 2 To change the Authorization Level SELECT the Authorization Level to which you wish to change If you are not changing to the Operator level then the Password Keypad window appears Enter the password and SELECT the OK pushbutton 3 To change a password first SELECT the Authorization Level you wish to change Then do the following a If you select a level that the system is not currently in the Password Keypad window appears Enter the password and SELECT the OK pushbutton b When the Password window returns SELECT the Change pushbutton The Password Keypad window appears c Enter the new password and SELECT the OK pushbutton to change the password If you decide not to change the password SELECT the Cancel pushbutton 80 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Checking for a Front Facing Page Do this task when your system uses the eject to front facing page facility or it is configured on the printer Also do this when you need to tell the printer that the next page to be printed is a front facing or a back facing page For example the following situations might require you to perform this task e Loading a new form name in the printer e Reloading forms after you clear a forms jam e Restarting printing operations in the middle of a job The eject to front facing page facility places a blank page between jobs that have an odd number of pages This ensures that
10. Coupled e RSI Compatible This item is ignored if you are configuring a preprocessing device interface Distance to Postprocessor Listed only for Advanced Postprocessor Pre Postprocessor Types If two AF postprocessors are installed the distance of the second postprocessor must exceed that of the first e If the first postprocessor is a Troy MICR 3900 add an extra 102 inches to the actual measured distance from the printer to the second postprocessor e If the first postprocessor is a Troy MICR 3900 High Speed add an extra 148 inches to the actual measured distance from the printer to the second postprocessor e If the first postprocessor is a Troy MICR 3835 add an extra 99 inches to the actual measured distance from the printer to the second postprocessor For more information see Using the IBM 3835 Page Printers and the IBM 3900 Advanced Function Printers with the Troy MICR Printers GA32 0261 e 24 to 800 inches Default is 99 e 24 to 1200 inches Default is 99 Postprocessor Error Page Stop Listed only for Advanced Postprocessor MICR Pre Postprocessor Type 0 to 50 pages Postprocessor Verify Alignment Page Stop Listed only for Advanced Postprocessor MICR Pre Postprocessor Type 0 to 5000 pages Pre Postprocessor Baud Rate in Kbps Listed only for Advanced Postprocessor Pre Postprocessor Types 19 2 or 62 5 244 InfoPrint 3000 Operato
11. Select a Form Name Width Form Description Letter fzo i Standard 8 5 x 12 in E Standard Length A 2UpLetter io 12x18 Unit Pinless mark Preprinted form V in Printable width Normal width Search HA Preheat 0 Vv OK Cancel Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job d To set or change the preheat platen temperature do the following e SELECT the Preheat field A keypad window appears e To use the default temperature enter 0 zero on the keypad and SELECT the OK pushbutton New Form HC60G082 Note The default temperature is set under the Configure Printer menu e To use a different temperature enter a number between 45 and 100 C in increments of 5 degrees for example 50 55 or 60 SELECT the OK pushbutton e When you finish making all changes to forms SELECT the OK pushbutton on the Define Forms window Chapter 8 Configuring the System 249 Operate Configure Analyze Options Help Assign Form to Load Select a Form Name Letter Description 8 5 x 12 in Form Size 12 000 by 8 500 inchq Lo Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job The forms are then available for the Assign Forms to Load window Search A2300171 Notes 1 For form width specify
12. Configure Traces Select a Trace Attachment link trace Stopped Print Attachment data trace Stopped Machine interface trace Stopped Save coniowe Help Start Stop Close Trace Trace Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job Figure 29 Traces Window A2300087 3 To start a trace a SELECT the trace you want to run from the Select a Trace box b SELECT the Start Trace pushbutton 4 To stop a trace a SELECT the trace you want to stop from the Select a Trace box b SELECT the Stop Trace pushbutton 5 To save trace data a Stop all traces b SELECT the Save pushbutton c Insert a diskette in the diskette drive and SELECT Save on the verification window that appears 148 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide 6 To print a trace a You must stop the trace before you can print it Do step kon page 149 b Disable all host attachments before you print a trace See 2 2 a for details c SELECT the Print pushbutton on the Traces window You see the Print Trace window SELECT the trace you want to print from the Select a Print File box e To change the number of copies you print do the following 1 SELECT the How Many field 2 Type the number of copies you want to print 3 SELECT the OK pushbutton f SELECT the Print pushbutton on the Print Trace window Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 149
13. Table 2 Operator Responsibilities continued What to Do When to Do It Where to Find More Information Clear forms jams and errors As indicated by messages on the Display Touch Screen Run traces As requested by the system programmer or service representative Change printer configuration As requested by the system programmer or service representative Clean the oiler belt Once each week Check the absorbent pad in the oil pan if they are installed Once each week Order supplies As necessary Report printer usage End of every month Switch print resolution As requested by system operator depending on the type of job being submitted Note Not all InfoPrint 3000 models have this capability 10 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Normal Operation Ready Status Before the printer can begin printing it must be in Ready status The printer is in Ready status when all of the following conditions have been met e The printer is powered on and ready e The fuser is warmed up and the printhead is ready e The initial microcode load IML sequence is complete on the system control unit e The Thread Align procedure has been successfully completed for duplex mode operation e The transfer station and all gates are closed and latched e All supplies are loaded e No errors are present e Host attachments are enabled e All enabled prep
14. 300169 N lt 3 If the fold direction is the way you want do the following to start or continue a print job a If necessary SELECT the Back Facing pushbutton The message text on the window changes to Next Page is Back Facing and the Back Facing pushbutton text changes to Front Facing text SELECTING that pushbutton again changes the message and pushbutton text back to where it was originally b SELECT the OK pushbutton This sets the front back pointer in the printer memory 4 If the fold direction is not the way you want do the following to start or continue a print job a b Cc Advance the forms one page by SELECTING the NPRO Page procedure from the Display Touch Screen Operate pull down menu If necessary SELECT the Back Facing pushbutton to set the window message text to agree with the fold direction The message text on the window changes to Next Page is Back Facing The Back Facing pushbutton text changes to Front Facing text Note Selecting that pushbutton again changes the message and pushbutton text back to where it was originally SELECT the OK pushbutton Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 83 Checking the Forms Alignment Do this task when you see a CHECK FORMS ALIGNMENT message or whenever you load splice or adjust forms HC60G094 1 At the upper rear transfer station tractor cover plate ensure that the forms perforation is aligned with the correct forms length 2 If the
15. 4 Advance the forms by SELECTING the NPRO pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen main window The END OF FORMS 078A message appears on the Display Touch Screen Note NPRO is not operable if the Thread Align Forms procedure window appears 5 SELECT the NPRO pushbutton again 88 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide In duplex mode the forms move through both Printer 1 and Printer 2 to either the stacker on Printer 2 or to a postprocessing device behind Printer 2 In simplex mode the forms move through the printer to the stacker or to a postprocessing device behind the printer If forms have moved to a printer stacker go to step a If forms have moved to a postprocessing device go to step nk 6 Unload the stacker See Perform the Shutdown procedure 7 Switch off power to the printer See for details Attention Damage to the printer can occur if you do not turn printer power off before you use the vacuum cleaner 8 Plug a toner certified vacuum cleaner into a 110 V ac outlet near the printer Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 89 DEVELOPER AREA HC60G055 9 Open the left top and front center left covers of the printer HC60G025 10 The printer has three coronas that you need to clean The charge corona 1 and the pre clean corona 2 are in the developer area the transfer corona 3 is in the transfer station area
16. A2300062 Note Although the switches are labeled Control Unit on this panel in the PUM frame of Printer 1 these switches control the power in the PUM frame not the AFCCU frame attached to Printer 2 18 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Using This Control Does This Control Unit Local Remote Switch Establishes where control unit power is controlled On Printer 1 When this switch is in the Local position the PUM is powered on and off by the Control Unit Power On and the Control Unit Power Off if in Local switches In the Remote position the PUM is powered on and off by Printer 2 control unit power controls On simplex printers and Printer 2 of a duplex configuration When this switch is in the Local position the AFCCU is powered on and off by the Control Unit Power On and the Control Unit Power Off if in Local switches In the Remote position the AFCCU is powered on and off by the controlling computer system Printer Local Remote Switch Control Unit Power On Switch Printer Power On Switch Establishes where printer power is controlled When this switch is in the Local position the printer is powered on and off by the Printer Power On and the Printer Power Off if in Local switches In the Remote position the printer is powered on and off by the Control Unit Power On and Control Unit Power Off If In Local switches on this panel Powers on the AFCCU frame or the PUM frame when the Control
17. See information in Beam 1 offset adjustment See information in Beam 1 offset adjustment Beam 3 offset adjustment See information in Beam 1 offset adjustment See information in Beam 1 offset adjustment Beam 4 offset adjustment See information in Beam 1 offset adjustment See information in Beam 1 offset adjustment Beam 5 offset adjustment See information in Beam 1 offset adjustment See information in Beam 1 offset adjustment Beam 1 offset adjustment for Printer 2 D See information in Beam 1 offset adjustment See information in Beam 1 offset adjustment Beam 2 offset adjustment for Printer 2 D See information in Beam 1 offset adjustment See information in Beam 1 offset adjustment Beam 3 offset adjustment for Printer 2 D See information in Beam 1 offset adjustment See information in Beam 1 offset adjustment Beam 4 offset adjustment for Printer 2 D See information in Beam 1 offset adjustment See information in Beam 1 offset adjustment Chapter 8 Configuring the System 227 Table 16 Printer Configuration Items continued Configuration Item Description Value Options Beam 5 offset adjustment for Printer 2 D See information in Beam 1 offset adjustment See information in Beam 1 offset adjustment Machine Sequence for Printer 1 CE Change on Initial Configuration Only This is the
18. To clean the charge 1 and preclean 2 coronas do the following 90 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Important Note About the Coronas There is no device to prevent you from pulling out the corona wires Be careful not to break the thin wires and tiny retractor springs inside the corona HC60G023 a Pull each white corona toward you until it is almost out of its track A brush inside the corona housing cleans the corona as you pull it out and then push it back in b Gently push each corona back into place Ensure that you have pushed the corona in completely 11 Use a cloth or paper towel to wipe away any paper dust toner or other debris from the developer area 12 Close the front center right cover of the printer Important The front center right cover must be completely closed whenever the printer is running Light entering the printer can significantly reduce print quality Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 91 FORMS INPUT AREA HC60G055 13 Open the top left and front left center covers of the printer if they are not already open 14 Use a toner certified vacuum cleaner to clean the e Input area 4 e End of forms sensor 5 e Tension arm 6 92 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide 15 16 18 19 TRANSFER STATION AREA Attention Use care when you clean behind the transfer station Open the transf
19. 226 18 11 2 f Maintenance Area Je 2426 gt j Ae 533 98 699 21 oe 28 l 864 Channel Cable Access 34 394 i aea 4 Dn Q 4 9 P X j __864 635 914 Printer 2 34 25 36 3032 iz 480 276 a PE jan 0 T 090 L115 1143 Front 43 4 5 864 45 34 L 2019 lk 2107 _ 80 J F Ta 5862 Ly 83 231 19 3 ry zi a l el ES Inch measurements are e Leveling Pad Printer 1 2 2107 shown in parentheses Power Cable 3 83 Caster le 2019 E E 8 80 2830 112 9 4 Pog hn j Cabe e B Access t ji j t 480 394 864 ai 4 1 S 1143 914 L 975 Z K 2719 45 oe 36 3930 38 107 8 11 120 10 0 Figure 45 Duplex Left Angle Configuration Appendix B Physical System Layouts 295 296 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Glossary The following terms are defined as they are used in InfoPrint 3000 documentation If you do not find the term you need refer to the index or to the IBM Dictionary of Computing SC20 1699 The following cross references are used in this glossary e Contrast with This refers to a term that has an opposed or substantively different meaning e Synonym for This indicates that the term has the same meaning as another term which is defined e Synonymous with This identifies terms that are synonyms for the term that is defined e See This refers to multiple word terms that have the same last word e See also This refers to related
20. 5 Degausses the monitor when selected Do not use this feature more than once in any 30 minute period 6 Recalls saved settings Highlight the required group of functions and press the OSD Select button Use the Highlight Adjust button to scroll to the adjustment icon you want to use and then press the OSD Select button Use the Highlight Adjust button to adjust the setting When the setting is correct press the OSD Select button to accept the new setting Several icons appear on the submenus that allow you to save adjusted settings exit the menu or cancel the changes and return to the main menu able 1d describes the icons you use after you have adjusted a setting Table 10 Submenu Icons Using This Control Does This Save Saves the adjustments you selected and returns to the main menu 66 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Table 10 Submenu Icons continued Using This Control Does This Cancel Cancels any adjustments you made and returns to the main menu Exit OSD gt Exits the OSD main menu after you press the OSD Select button Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 67 Adjusting the Print Position Do this task when you load preprinted forms adhesive labels or other forms that require a precise registration that is not satisfied by the factory set default registration Requirement For This Procedure You must have a print job queued so that print data is
21. Adjusting the Preheat Temperature The Preheat selection in Form Characteristics box of the Define Form window allows you to increase the preheat platen temperature to enhance fusing of labels or heavy stock forms You increase or decrease the temperature in increments of 5 until optimum fusing is achieved You should not use the lower temperature settings to print on some synthetic forms such as vinyl or latex impregnated forms When you are using regular forms the temperature should be set to the default value The default value is set in Printer Configuration To adjust the preheat platen temperature do the following e SELECT the Configure pull down menu on the main Display Touch Screen window e SELECT the Define Form procedure Operate Configure Analyze Options Printer Status Define Forms Select a Form Name Width Form Description Letter fzo j Standard 8 5 x 12 in a Standard Length Form Characteristics 2UpLetter Z 12x18 Pinless No _ Unit V in OK New Form Delete Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job e SELECT the Form Name for which you want to change the preheat temperature e SELECT the Preheat field A keypad window appears e ENTER the new temperature in increments of 5 such as 75 85 90 Pinless mark Preprinted form Printable width Normal width Preheat 0 v Cancel
22. Complete the Thread Align Forms procedure by adding enough forms beyond Printer 2 to splice on the floor between Printer 2 and a postprocessing device forms just loaded on Printer 2 to the forms remaining threaded in a postprocessing device c Do all the steps in for both Printer 1 and Panic 2 Station in Printer 1 and the top of the Stacker in Printer 2 are reprinted Check for and discard duplicate pages If the jam was the result of a FUSER WRAP 0134 in printer 2 all lost or damaged pages may not be reprinted Work with the host system console operator to recover these pages operator to recover the lost pages 44 if the error recurs frequently Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 131 Table 14 Printer 2 Jam Recovery Procedures Duplex Mode continued Error Message SRC Code In Numeric Order UPPER TRACTOR FORMS JAM 0119 TENSION ARM DOWN 0131 TENSION ARM UP 0132 SKEW ERROR 0133 FUSER WRAP 0134 Forms are NOT jammed torn or separated Recovery Actions 1 10 11 12 If you do not find a forms jam do the following a Be aware that dark colored backing on the forms can cause the printer to display these messages b The message UPPER TRACTOR FORMS JAM 0119 may appear if the printer engine top cover is open and allowing light to affect an optical sensor Ensure that the top cover is closed c Clean the upper tractor jam sensor See step Open the upper tractor cover
23. Department H7FE Building 003G Information Development PO Box 1900 Boulder CO USA 80301 9191 IBM may use or distribute whatever information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you Visit our home page at http www printers ibm com Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1998 All rights reserved Note to U S Government Users Documentation related to restricted rights Use duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp Online Documentation Authorization For online versions of this book we authorize you to e Copy modify and print the documentation contained on the media for use within your enterprise provided you reproduce the copyright notice all warning statements and other required statements on each copy or partial copy e Transfer the original unaltered copy of the documentation when you transfer the related IBM product which may be either machines you own or programs if the program s license terms permit a transfer You must at the same time destroy all other copies of the documentation You are responsible for payment of any taxes including personal property taxes resulting from this authorization THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied
24. FORMS but forms are present Something is preventing the printer from sensing that forms are available Narrow forms sometimes slide sideways away from the paper sensor e Inspect the forms in the forms input area for holes in the printable area Missing data at the rear of the forms printer right hand side The rear tractor could be out of adjustment Ensure that you are using the correct form width for the form ID that was entered Ensure that the correct form ID was entered for that form 270 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Chapter 10 Responding to Messages M Chapter Overview This chapter lists the messages and codes that the printer displays and it gives information about how to interpret and respond to them The error types in their order of precedence are 80 lists all of the Copyright IBM Corp 1998 271 Program Check Messages Program Check messages show that the internal control unit microcode has detected a problem that may not allow the code to keep running Program Check messages appear on the Display Touch Screen Soft Program Check Operate Configure Analyze Options Program Check A program check has occured Select Restart to shut down and restart the printer Select Cancel to continue without shutting down and restarting the printer Source 30 Source ID 8000 Sense Data 010203040405060708090a0b0c0d0e0f1011
25. Figure 24 Stacker Height Control To adjust the output stack height do the following Remove any output on the stacker table Open the front left cover Loosen the knob by turning it counterclockwise Raise or lower the knob to the desired stack height Tighten the knob by turning it clockwise oaron a Close the front left cover Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 117 Preprocessing and Postprocessing Instructions 118 The printers have three interface ports These ports may be equipped with pre postprocessor Pre Post or Advanced Function postprocessing AF Post device interface adaptors as shown in the following table Port 1 comes with a Pre Post device interface adaptor standard The following table assumes that adaptor is installed Table 11 Pre Postprocessor Interface Options Port Configuration Options 1 Pre Post Pre Post Pre Post Pre Post Pre Post Pre Post 2 Pre Post Pre Post AF Post Pre Post AF Post 3 Pre Post AF Post Pre Post 1 Port 3 is not available on Model ED2 for details on 1 configuring devices that are being aded to the device interface adaptors that reside in the three ports in the printer Powering On and Off Pre Post Devices The following procedures may be necessary for the protection of the operator and the equipment The printers recognize electronically attached devices only if those devices are powered on Attention To avoid dama
26. M f A Directions 1 Unload forms from the stacker Refer to the operator s pe guide for detailed instructions if necessary 2 Select Check Reset 3 Select Ready to continue printing 4 Call for service if the problem continues Check Reso Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job Figure 41 Intervention Required Window A2300109 This window contains the following e A short description of the detected condition e A four character System Reference Code SRC which is used for logging intervention conditions e An indication of which printer the condition applies to e Function pushbuttons Check Reset Informs the control unit that you have completed all actions necessary to correct this interruption Help Displays help information m Notes 1 You must handle all Intervention Required conditions except SRC D206 immediately You can postpone SRC D206 Ready Selected Before Forms Thread Aligned although you must eventually execute the Thread Align Forms procedure before you can make the system Ready 2 See Table 30 on page 281 for a list of all messages of this type 3 Intervention Required messages appear on the printer Display Touch Screen Chapter 10 Responding to Messages 277 Status Messages Status messages describe the condition of a printer or the system Sometimes they are a response to operator action Status messages are only for you
27. Printer 1 and Printer 2 e The main Thread Align Forms procedure window appears on the Display Touch Screen e A print job is queued and host attachments are enabled if the Print While Threading option is selected Operate Configure Analyze Options Thread Align Forms SSS Printer 1 Select No or Yes in the Print While No Feed Page Threading Field Select Start to Start the Thread Align Feed Page Forms Procedure Print While Threading Yes Printer 2 Forms are Connected Feed Forms Start Mark is Complies Cancel Aligned HRP Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job A2300157 Threading Without Printing 1 SELECT the No option within the Print While Threading field 2 SELECT the Start pushbutton 3 If no forms were damaged and there is enough slack in the forms splice the forms together Go to step Bon page 1641 4 If forms were damaged and must be removed or there is not enough slack to splice the forms back together use either the Feed Forms or Printer 1 Feed Page pushbuttons to advance the forms through Printer 1 enough to splice the forms together The first selection of either the Feed Forms or the Printer 1 Feed Page pushbutton does the following a This prints a solid alignment mark after the leading edge on a page in Printer 1 which is designated as an alignment page A one bar or two bar pattern
28. SELECT the Print Samples procedure The Print Samples window appears c SELECT the type and number of samples you wish to print and SELECT the Print pushbutton In the printed output check for the following e Is the print dark enough e Is the printing clear and easy to read especially close to edges perforations holes and cuts e Is print quality uniform across the page e Are spots or blank areas on every page or on every other page Important Many print quality problems are directly related to the kind of forms that are being used and the application that is being processed If a particular form or application regularly produces unsatisfactory output refer the application owner to the Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers This publication contains detailed information about selecting forms and designing applications for use with continuous forms printers If the output shows any of the problems that are mentioned above see able 27 and perform the actions that are detailed there Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 85 Cleaning the Oiler Belt Notes to the Operator On Cleaning the Oiler Belt e For reliable printer performance clean the oiler belt at least once each week e You need the following items to clean the oiler belt Lightweight cardboard scraps Cloth or paper towels e It is not necessary to switch the printer power off during this procedure
29. Setup Window for Thread Align Forms Main Thread Align Forms Window Inline Configuration Left Angle Configuration Configure Printer Window Configure Pre Postprocessors Window Duplex Mode Define Forms Window Duplex Mode Soft Program Check Window i Hard Program Check Window N ornial Operations Printer Error Window Out of Supplies Window Intervention Required Window Printer Status Window Simplex Configuration Duplex Inline Configuration Duplex Left Angle Configuration 121 127 130 147 148 152 154 167 168 219 242 248 272 273 274 276 277 278 293 294 295 ix X InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Tables NLS GE ON 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 InfoPrint 3000 Printer Specification Summary Operator Responsibilities Developer Area Controls Printer Control Panel Symbols and Visual Cues Remote Power Control Remote System Power Control Duplex Models Local System Power Control Duplex Models User Controls on the Monitor Submenu Icons Pre Postprocessor Interface Options Jam Recovery Procedures Simplex Mode Printer 1 Jam Recovery Procedures Duplex Mode Printer 2 Jam Recovery Procedures Duplex Mode IBM Supplies Worksheet Printer Configuration Items Copyright IBM Corp 1998 58 59 65 66 118 123 129 131 177 221 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Sis Parallel Channel A
30. down fold Fanfold forms are alternately folded When fanfold forms are unfolded and held horizontally a fold is a down fold if it points down from the horizontal surface DPE Decompression Performance Enhancement drag The resistance to forms feeding freely into the printer for example the form rubbing against the carton duplex printing A mode of printing on both sides of a form Contrast with simplex printing E EBCDIC Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code EC Engineering change electronic overlay A collection of constant data electronically composed in the controlling computer Can be merged with variable data on a page during printing An electronic overlay defines its own environment It can be in coded form or raster pattern form See also preprinted form electrophotographic process The creation of an image on forms by uniformly charging the photoconductor creating an electrostatic image on the photoconductor attracting negatively charged toner to the discharged areas of the photoconductor and transferring and fusing the toner to forms emboss To press and raise the surface of paper into a design Embossed paper appears thicker than nonembossed paper can increase printer wear and can degrade print quality end of forms sensor A sensor that detects when the last sheet of a form enters the printer error log 1 A data set or file in a product or system where error information is stored
31. link A A05D ESCON attachment Forced offline link B AO5E ESCON attachment Log only link failure AO5F Link failure link B A200 370 Parallel attachment Data parity error A201 370 Parallel attachment Data streaming overrun A203 370 Parallel attachment Online failure A205 370 Parallel attachment Bus out parity checks 284 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Table 30 SRC Messages continued Code Message Text Type Printer Error unless noted otherwise A206 370 Parallel attachment Functional failure A209 370 Parallel attachment Card diagnostic failed Interface A A210 370 Parallel attachment Card diagnostic failed Interface B A211 370 Parallel attachment Wrap diagnostic failed Interface A A212 370 Parallel attachment Wrap diagnostic failed Interface B A213 370 Parallel attachment Controller configuration failure A214 370 Parallel attachment AIX system call failure A215 370 Parallel attachment PCA card operation failure A216 370 Parallel attachment PCA internal error A217 370 Parallel attachment Bad file cannot open A218 370 Parallel attachment Program Error A220 370 Parallel attachment Bad command A221 370 Parallel attachment Line mode page mode switch A222 370 Parallel attachment Data received after ACK request A400 Token Ring TCP IP Token Ring timeout A401 Token Ring TCP IP Basic test fa
32. problem analysis and service request procedures that IBM or your reseller provide b Secure all programs data and funds contained in a Machine c Inform IBM or your reseller of changes in a Machine s location and d For a Machine with exchange service remove all features parts options alterations and attachments not under warranty service Also the Machine must be free of any legal obligations or restrictions that prevent its exchange and 3 Be responsible for loss of or damage to a Machine in transit when you are responsible for the transportation charges Extent of Warranty xiv IBM does not warrant uninterrupted or error free operation of a Machine Misuse accident modification unsuitable physical or operating environment improper maintenance by you or failure caused by a product for which IBM is not responsible may void the warranties THESE WARRANTIES REPLACE ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE HOWEVER SOME LAWS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES IF THESE LAWS APPLY THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD NO WARRANTIES APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD In Canada warranties include both warranties and conditions Some jurisdictions do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts so the above limitation may not apply to yo
33. the Postprocessing Device Clearing the Forms Path Transfer Station Area Fuser and Stacker Areas Stacker and Pendulum Area Suggestions for Preventing Jams Reporting Printer Usage Running Traces Adjusting the Preheat Temperature Poor Fusing Simplex Mode Forms Stick Together Heat Damage Printer Running Thread Align Forms Forms Are Loaded Through Both Printers Forms Are Not Loaded In Printer 2 Forms Are Broken Between the Printers Threading the Buffer Flipper Unit Straight Line Configuration Left Angle Configuration Unloading the Stacker Switching Printer Modes Dual Simplex Duplex Vi InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide 66 68 74 75 75 76 78 79 81 84 85 86 88 101 102 115 117 118 118 118 119 119 119 120 121 122 123 126 127 135 136 136 140 143 144 146 148 150 5 151 s 151 152 154 158 162 167 167 168 169 172 Switching from Duplex to Dual Simplex Mode Switching from Dual Simplex to Duplex Mode Switching Print Resolution Chapter 7 spa and eee Supplies Supplies IBM Supplies Worksheet Ordering Supplies Maintenance Supply Items Customer Replaceable Supply Items Warranty Returns Poo 4 Storing Supplies Adding Fuser Oil Changing the Toner Cartridge Checking the Toner Collector Changing the Toner Collector Changing the Developer Mix Checking the Fin
34. the stacker jams Forms Feed Forward Forward R4C00100 Moves the forms toward the transfer station and stacker area Forms in the forms path between the transfer station and the fuser are not fused Forms Feed Reverse Reverse R4C00101 Moves the forms away from the transfer station into the input bin Note When you use this function it may be necessary to press the Puller Control Lever to release pressure on the forms in the fuser area This can prevent a down condition of the tension arm and tearing or damage of the forms 24 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Transfer Station Control Lever and Tractor Control Levers The transfer station control lever and the tractor control knob are on the transfer station frame HC60G062 Using This Control Does This Transfer Station Control Lever 1 Releases the transfer station latch and opens the transfer station To open the transfer station you move the lever to the left and lift the transfer station in a counterclockwise direction To close the transfer station you lower the transfer station in a clockwise direction You then move the lever to the left and press down on the transfer station to latch it in place During printing the transfer station should be firmly latched in the closed position Tractor Control Levers 2 Allow you to change the distance between the front and rear tractors When you move th
35. 14 Options Pull Down Menu Assign Form to Load Assigns the defined name of the form you are loading A form does not appear on the list until you define it From within this procedure you can also invoke the Adjust Print and Print Test procedures See Loading Enable Disable Attachments Lets you enable and disable the host system attachments that are installed on the system See more information Password Lets you set the authorization level of the person who is working on the printer It also allows you to change the user authorization password Access to higher user authorization levels is password protected See for more information Clean Screen Gives you 30 seconds to clean the face of the monitor If one 30 second interval is not long enough you can repeat this procedure as many times as necessary 50 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Calibrate Touch Screen Removes the displacement between where you touch the screen surface and the small symbol that appears on the screen when you touch it Front Face Lets you place a blank page between jobs that have an odd number of pages It also ensures that jobs that require a certain folding pattern are printed correctly See more information Special Features Lets you enable disable install and uninstall special features customer requested features that are also known as RPQs You can install special features from a diskette or from the printer
36. 2 of a duplex or dual simplex configuration e Or the PUM frame on Printer 1 HC60G065 Fuser oil reservoir Usage meter Toner collector Fine filter Pre Postprocessor device cable connection area behind rear cover O un F WO N me Operator alert assembly 32 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Chapter 4 Using the Display Touch Screen This chapter describes the Display Touch Screen windows and their associated components These windows are similar to those that are used in OS 2 and other graphical environments The Display Touch Screen is touch sensitive To interact with it you touch the screen as though you were pressing a pushbutton switch making a selection from a list or entering data on a keyboard The graphics in this book that depict the Display Touch Screen do not match the actual windows in every detail The windows on your Display Touch Screen have a title bar at the top that is not shown in this book Using the Display Touch Screen in Duplex and Dual Simplex Modes In duplex mode the two printers work as one logical printer and are controlled from a single Display Touch Screen In dual simplex mode each physical printer works independently of the other The monitor has two logical Display Touch Screens one for controlling each printer To switch from one printer to the other select the Next Printer pushbutton on
37. 5 262 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Selected Value Form Identification Worksheets a 64 to record form identification names with their ssogenied lengths widths description and characteristics You can define up to 1024 different forms for duplex and simplex modes and 1024 additional forms for each printer in dual simplex mode for a total of 3072 form definitions for the complete system Make copies of the worksheets as necessary You may also find it helpful to make notes about loading techniques adjusting print values or other information that may be particular to certain forms Chapter 8 Configuring the System 263 Form Identification Worksheet Table 26 Form Identification Worksheet Form Number Definition With This Value Notes Name Width in millimeters or inches Length in millimeters or inches Description Preheat temperature Name Width in millimeters or inches Length in millimeters or inches Description Preheat temperature Name Width in millimeters or inches Length in millimeters or inches Description Preheat temperature Name Width in millimeters or inches Length in millimeters or inches Description Preheat temperature Name Width in millimeters or inches Length in millimeters or inches Description Preheat temperature Name Width in millimeters or inche
38. 6 8 Not Installed N A N A N A Card 2 Slot Position 6 8 Not Installed N A N A N A ESCON Channel ESCON Link A Installed Yes No ESCON Link B Installed Yes No Chapter 8 Configuring the System 253 Table 24 Configuration Worksheet Duplex Models continued Selected Values 254 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Item Available Values Duplex Dual Simplex Printer 1 Printer 2 Device Address 00 to FF Multi host Environmental Flag True False Card 1 Slot Position 6 8 Not Installed N A N A N A Card 2 Slot Position 6 8 Not Installed N A N A N A Token Ring TCP IP Configuration Installed Yes No TCP Port 5001 to 65536 IP Address X X X X where X lt 255 Subnet Mask X X X X where X lt 255 Default Gateway Address X X X X where X lt 255 MTU Size 60 to 4096 Hardware address Cannot be changed N A N A N A Alternate address X 0 to X FFFFFFFFFFFF Ring Speed 4 or 16 Confine Broadcast Yes No Ethernet TCP IP Configuration Installed Yes No TCP Port 5001 to 65536 IP Address X X X X where X lt 255 Subnet Mask X X X X where X lt 255 Default Gateway Address X X X X where X lt 255 Standard MTU Size 60 to 1500 TEEE8023 MTU Size 60 to 1492 Ethernet Type Standard or EEE8023 Hardware address Cannot be changed N A N A N A Alternate address X 0 to X FFFFFFFFFFFF Cable type 10Base2 or 10Bas
39. Caster Figure 43 Simplex Configuration Copyright IBM Corp 1998 293 Duplex Models The dimensions of the InfoPrint 3000 duplex printers and the Buffer Flipper Unit the optimum separation of the units the service clearance around the allowable configurations of these units and the power cable and channel cable locations are shown in Figure 44 and Figure 45 on nage 204 Note The minimum size for Channel Cable Access opening is 200 x 200 mm 8 x 8 in F EE J Maintenance Area 2537 Maintenance Area 533 100 699 21 975 28 Channel Cable Access Cable E 38 864 Access 38 P EN 34 276 864 34 1 276 pue L 394 11 34 394 1 16 7 16 7 ey s 9 P A P rs 3 o Pic fe ag L 914 Printer 2 635 914 Printer 1 36 T E 36 D 3032 he o ot tlt e e ol ot tte 120 480 a i 50 480 E 19 2 7 19 Front Front 1143 45 I 2019 2019 l 864 80 80 34 le 2107 60 gt 2107 60 34 83 83 i L 7770 it al 306 25 6 e Inch measurements are e Leveling Pad g shown in parentheses Power Cable o Caster g Figure 44 Duplex Inline Configuration 294 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide le 5751
40. Code In Numeric Order Recovery Actions UPPER TRACTOR FORMS JAM 0119 TENSION ARM DOWN 0131 TENSION ARM UP 0132 SKEW ERROR 0133 FUSER WRAP 0134 Forms are jammed torn or separated Clear the forms path See If any of the Printer Error messages are still displayed SELECT the Check Reset pushbutton on the Printer Error Display Touch Screen window Check for and resolve or postpone any other error or intervention message appearing on the Display Touch Screen windows a SELECT the Feed Forms pushbutton once this provides enough forms beyond Printer 1 to splice the forms on the floor between Printer 1 and Printer 2 just loaded on Printer 1 to the forms remaining in the path b Complete the Thread Align Forms procedure c Do all the steps in for both Printer 1 and Printer 2 SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen window for the affected printer If reprinting is allowed all unfused pages between the transfer station in Printer 1 and the top of the stacker plus any jam recovery point distance defined in the printer configuration in Printer 2 are reprinted Check for and discard duplicate pages If reprinting is not allowed work with the host system console operator to recover the lost pages 44 if the error recurs frequently Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 129 Table 13 Printer 1 Jam Recovery Procedures Duplex Mode continued Err
41. Coupled Preprocessor e Coupled Postprocessor e Advanced Postprocessor MICR e Advanced Postprocessor SMM Select Medium Modification Characteristics Pre Postprocessor Extended NPRO 0 to 800 inches Chapter 8 Configuring the System 255 Table 24 Configuration Worksheet Duplex Models continued Selected Values Item Available Values Duplex Dual Simplex Printer 1 Printer 2 Pre Postprocessor Busy Timer 1 to 999 seconds Postprocessor Tag Type Coupled e RSI Compatible e Advanced Distance to Postprocessor e 24 to 800 inches e 24 to 1200 inches Postprocessor Error Page Stop 0 to 50 pages Postprocessor Verify Alignment Page 0 to 5000 pages Stop Pre Postprocessor Baud Rate in 19 2 or 62 5 Kbps DEVICE Number Printer Number 1 2 N A N A Port Number 1 2 3 Enabled Yes No Name 1 to 12 alphanumeric characters including spaces Type e Coupled Preprocessor e Coupled Postprocessor e Advanced Postprocessor MICR e Advanced Postprocessor SMM Select Medium Modification Characteristics Pre Postprocessor Extended NPRO 0 to 800 inches Pre Postprocessor Busy Timer 1 to 999 seconds Postprocessor Tag Type Coupled e RSI Compatible e Advanced Distance to Postprocessor e 24 to 800 inches e 24 to 1200 inches Postprocessor Error Page Stop 0 to 50 pages Postprocessor Verify Alignment Page 0 to 5000 pag
42. Error Window A2300093 This window contains the following A short description of the detected error condition The four character System Reference Code SRC which is used for logging of error conditions An indication of which printer the error occurred on If the error message is for the control unit this field is not included on the window A step by step recovery procedure or directions to another source of procedures Function pushbuttons Completed This pushbutton is included only for error conditions that may be postponed Select it when you complete all recovery actions Postpone This pushbutton is included only for error conditions that may be postponed Select it when you want to postpone error recovery The message is then listed in the Messages selection list box on the Printer Status window which you can select from the Operate pull down menu Check Reset This pushbutton is included only for error conditions that you must handle immediately Select it when you complete all recovery actions 274 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Help This pushbutton is included on all Printer Error windows Select it to display help information for the panel m Notes 1 Hable 30 on page 281 lists all printer error messages 2 Printer error messages appear in the printer Display Touch Screen area for the printer on which the error occurred Chapter 10 Responding to Messages 275 Out Of S
43. Forms From The Stacker Do not attempt to remove a full stack from the stacker e Limit the maximum weight of the stack by breaking the output into small stacks start with 150 mm 6 in high by separating the forms at convenient perforations e Use a ruler knife or letter opener to break hard to reach perforations when you separate forms e Follow these guidelines when you lift forms out of the stacker a b Ensure that you can stand safely without slipping Try to keep your back straight and balance the weight of the forms between your feet Use a slow lifting force Never move suddenly or twist when you attempt to lift Lift by standing or by pushing up with your leg muscles This action removes the strain from the muscles in your back 7 Remove the output from the stacker 8 On the stacker control panel press the stacker table UP switch 9 Close the stacker gate 10 To continue SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen window m Note on Adjusting the Height of the Output Stack You can adjust the stacker table to limit the output stack height and weight Raising the stacker table lessens the height and weight of the stack but causes the STACKER FULL message to appear more frequently To adjust the stacker table height see Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 171 Switching Printer Modes Dual Simplex Duplex Use these procedures to switch between duplex and du
44. Forms procedure by using the Operate menu 6 After you have visually verified that the Printer 1 alignment mark is aligned correctly on Printer 2 SELECT the Mark is Aligned pushbutton on the window At the Verification window SELECT the OK pushbutton This informs the control unit that the alignment is complete m Important If your visual verification of alignment is incorrect the following duplex print jobs are printed with incorrect alignment between the front and back of the pages 7 If a postprocessing device is installed and not threaded SELECT the Feed Forms pushbutton on the window as many times as necessary to advance the forms enough to thread the postprocessing device 8 SELECT the Completed pushbutton on the window that closes this window This completes this type of Thread Align Forms procedure 9 SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the main Display Touch Screen window to begin printing Operate Analyze Options Configure Hi Thread Align Forms Print While Threading Printer 1 Select No or Yes in the Print While No Feed Page Threading Field Was 8 Printer 2 Select Start to Start the Thread Align Feed Page Forms Procedure Forms are Connected Feed Forms Mark is Start Completed Cancel Aligned Help Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job Print While Threading SELECT the Yes option within the Print While Threadin
45. If the window reappears after the completion of the Restart procedure SELECT the Shutdown pushbutton At the completion of the Shutdown procedure power off the system Switch power on to the system At the completion of the power on sequence retry the operation in progress when the Program Check condition occurred Call for service if the problem continues For a Master Program Check occurring during a power on bring up sequence do the following SELECT the Save Traces pushbutton to save trace data to diskette if desired SELECT the Continue pushbutton If the window reappears call for service Chapter 10 Responding to Messages 273 Printer Error Messages Printer Error messages show that a serious hardware microcode or host interface problem has been detected in a printer or in the control unit An operator can sometimes but not always recover from this problem Figure 39 shows a sample Printer Error window Operate Configure Analyze Options Printer Error Printer Error Printer interface error Error Code 0656 Printer 2 Directions Press Check Reset A 1 2 If this window reappears 3 Shutdown the system From the Operate pull down menu 4 Power off the system 5 6 Power on and retry Call for service if the problem continues Check Resa Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job Figure 39 Printer
46. Operator Responsibilities 143 Suggestions for Preventing Jams The best way to prevent jams is to use forms and applications that were designed for use with the printers Form and application problems cannot be corrected by adjusting or repairing the printer If a particular form jams frequently refer the application owner to the Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers This book contains detailed information about selecting forms and designing applications for use with continuous forms printers It is also important to ensure that the forms are loaded correctly To prevent jams from happening do the following Ensure that the forms are not being damaged in one of the following areas Forms input area Before they reach the transfer corona within the printer engine In the Buffer Flipper Unit between the printers when they are in duplex mode Ensure that the perforations have ties at the ends not cuts Ensure that the back sides of the forms do not have dark colors or markings when you use simplex mode Also ensure that both sides of the forms do not have dark colors or markings when the printers are in duplex mode If you are using fan fold forms ensure that the folded or leading edge is not wrinkled or torn If you are using fan fold forms and the first page is folded under ensure that the tractor holes line up exactly This is especially important if you are using forms with a 3 in
47. Printer 2 and through Printer 2 and found That the perforations are aligned with the alignment scale on the rear tractor covers That the forms path is not separated e A print job is queued and host attachments are enabled if you intend to select the Print While Threading Yes option 154 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Operate Configure Options Thread Align Forms Print While Threading Printer 1 Select No or Yes in the Print While No Feed Page Threading Field ies O Printer 2 Select Start to Start the Thread Align Feed Page Forms Procedure Forms are Connected Feed Forms Mark is Aligned Help Analyze Start Complies Cancel Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job A2300157 Threading Without Printing 1 2 3 4 SELECT the No option within the Print While Threading field SELECT the Start pushbutton SELECT the Forms are Connected pushbutton SELECT the Feed to Align pushbutton on the Thread Align Forms window a This prints a solid alignment mark after the leading edge on a page in Printer 1 which is designated as an alignment page A one bar or two bar pattern is also printed on the alignment page The bar shows whether Side 1 or Side 2 of the form is being printed on Printer 1 This prints a dashed alignment mark after the leading edge of the page b This feeds a fi
48. Printer 2 frame the AFCCU frame and the PUM frame has the following e A Local Remote switch e A Power On switch e A Power Off if in Local switch These switches allow many combinations of Local Remote power control and power on off control Each Power Control Panel in the system also contains a Unit Emergency switch 56 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide m Attention The Unit Emergency switch lets you turn off all power to the system in the case of an emergency Do not use the Unit Emergency Power Off switch to power off the system unless you have an emergency Doing so can cause loss of data and hardware problems in the AFCCU Local Remote Power Control You can press the Remote and Local switches on the Power Control Panel to change power control from local to remote at any time Local power control means that you can turn power on and off using the switches on the Power Control Panel Remote power control means that you turn power on and off from another source as shown in Table 6 Remote Power Control Element Remote Power Controlled From Control Unit Power AFCCU Frame Host System Console Printer Power Printer 1 and Simplex AFCCU Frame Control Unit Power PUM Frame AFCCU Frame Printer Power Printer 2 AFCCU Frame Powering On the System You can switch power on for the complete system for duplex or simplex mode use You can also switch power on for only one printer and it
49. Repeat this step for as many items as you want to change 230 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide d When you have made all the changes SELECT the OK pushbutton You see the Configure Attachments window If you want to change configuration information for other attachments repeat the previous steps as necessary e When you have made all attachment changes SELECT the OK pushbutton on the Configure Attachments window You see the Restart prompting window f If you have other configuration changes to make you can make them before you restart the system If your configuration changes are complete SELECT the Restart pushbutton to make them effective Note SELECTING Restart does the following e If you are making this change in duplex or simplex mode a window appears that informs you that an automatic Shutdown procedure has started This window is followed by a window stating that the system is being rebooted AFCCU microcode is being reloaded At the completion of the microcode reload the attachment changes are in effect You do not have to power off the system and then power it on e If you are making this change in dual simplex mode the Display Touch Screen screen goes blank while an internal Shutdown procedure is executed on the printer on which you are working The system then displays a message that indicates that the other printer must be shutdown for the changes to take affect This message is followed by the Display Touch
50. SMM Select Medium Modification Pre Postprocessor Characteristics Pre Postprocessor Extended NPRO non process runout Listed for all Pre Postprocessor Types Extends the NPRO Enter a non zero value to extend the fixed NPRO length because of preprocessing or postprocessing device usage Setting the NPRO Length configuration item under the Configure Printer also sets this function The Pre Postprocessor Extended NPRO value overrides the Configure Printer NPRO Length value if both are set to non zero values 0 to 800 inches Default is 150 Pre Postprocessor Busy Timer Listed only for Coupled Pre Postprocessor Types Specifies the length of time in seconds that follows a Preprocessing or Postprocessing device going to Busy status before the status automatically changes to Not Ready The printer does not report Busy status to the host system but does report Not Ready status 1 to 999 seconds Default is 300 Chapter 8 Configuring the System 243 Table 23 Pre Postprocessor Device Configuration Items continued Selectable Field Item Description Value Options Postprocessor Tag Type Listed only for Coupled Pre Postprocessor Types Specify a Coupled tag type for all Postprocessing devices not manufactured by Roll System Inc Specify an RSI Compatible tag type for all Postprocessing devices manufactured by Roll System Inc
51. Screen window for the other printer You must select the Shutdown Restart procedure from the Operate pull down menu on that Display Touch Screen window and then execute the Shutdown routine A window appears stating that the system is being rebooted At the completion of the reboot the attachment changes are in effect with no system power off and power on procedure required Chapter 8 Configuring the System 231 Parallel Channel Configuration Information lists all configuration items the purpose of each item and the allowable value options for each item The factory set default values are underlined Table 17 Parallel Channel Attachment Items Configuration Item Description Value Options Parallel Link A Specifies if Parallel Channel Link A is installed Yes or No Installed Parallel Link B Specifies if Parallel Channel Link B is installed Yes or No Installed Device Address Specifies the 2 digit hexadecimal channel address which includes the device address Notes 1 In simplex mode only one device address is required In dual simplex mode each printer requires a unique device address Printer 1 requires an even number for example X 30 Printer 2 requires the next consecutive number for example X 31 2 The duplex system does not require a unique number It can use either of the addresses used for dual simplex Printer 1 or dual simplex Printer 2 However it is often easier from
52. Specifies the mask that identifies the local subnet in X X X X where X lt 255 dotted decimal format Get this value from your LAN administrator If you do not have a local subnet leave this field blank Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway in dotted X X X X where X lt 255 Address decimal format Get this value from your LAN administrator MTU Size Specifies the Maximum Transmission Unit MTU 60 to 4096 maximum allowable length of IP packets Hardware address Specifies the TCP IP Token Ring adapter ROM address This address cannot be changed Chapter 8 Configuring the System 235 Table 19 Token Ring TCP IP Attachment Items continued Configuration Item Description Value Options Alternate address Local adapter Sets the unique LAN adapter address for the network The address must be different from other addresses on X 0 to X FFFFFFFFFFFF address the LAN Ring Speed Specifies the ring speed of the network to which the 4 or 16 adapter attaches The value must match the speed of the network or the network may stop operating Confine Broadcast Specifies if broadcast packets that is Address Resolution Yes or No Protocol packets are enabled to cross bridges to other rings 236 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Ethernet TCP IP Attachment Information able 20 lists all configuration items what each item is used for and the a
53. Stop R4C00108 28 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Using This Control Does This Moves the stacker table up R4C00104 Stops the movement of the stacker table ep r O O R4C00108 Moves the stacker table down R4C00105 Advances the forms to allow them to stack with the original folds at the perforations Note You use the NPRO pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen to advance the forms for separation R4C00100 Forms Select Sets the weight or kind of form to be used as well as the fusing temperature and the amount of fuser oil used during printing The current selection is indicated by an LED Not setting Forms Select correctly can reduce print quality e The A setting is for 16 22 Ibs 60 82 g m weight forms It should not be used for heavier weight forms e The B setting is for 23 42 Ibs 83 157 g m weight forms It uses more fuser oil than setting A and should not be used for lighter weight forms A2300050 e The C setting lowers the fuser temperature and should be used when printing adhesive labels or other special composition forms Chapter 3 Functional Areas 29 Forms Length and Width Controls HC60G064 Using This Control Does This FORMS WIDTH 1 Increases or decreases the stacker width setting You can set this lever from 8 to 18 inches in increments of inch FORMS LENGTH 2 30 InfoPri
54. Text Type Printer Error unless noted otherwise 0795 Set forms direction Intervention Required 0796 Stacker full Intervention Required 0797 Stacker gate open Intervention Required 0798 Stacker table down Intervention Required 0799 Check fine filter Intervention Required 0841 Postprocessor not ready 0842 Postprocessor STOP line active A000 ESCON attachment Program error A001 ESCON attachment Functional error A010 ESCON Attachment Card diagnostic failed Link A A018 ESCON attachment Wrap diagnostic failed Link A A020 ESCON attachment Card diagnostic failed Link B A028 ESCON attachment Wrap diagnostic failed Link B A030 ESCON attachment AIX system call failed A040 ESCON attachment Controller configuration value error A041 ESCON attachment General load failure A042 ESCON attachment No ESCON configuration file A050 ESCON attachment Data overrun link A A051 ESCON attachment Data overrun link B A052 ESCON attachment Lost connection link A A053 ESCON attachment Lost connection link B A054 ESCON attachment Bus out check link A A055 ESCON attachment Bus out check link B A056 ESCON attachment Online failed link A A057 ESCON attachment Online failed link B A058 ESCON attachment Spurious interrupt link A A059 ESCON attachment Spurious Interrupt link B A05A ESCON attachment Unknown CCW link A A05B ESCON attachment Unknown CCW link B A05C ESCON attachment Forced offline
55. The printer control panel is just below the transfer station able 4 describes its controls HC60G001 Table 4 Printer Control Panel Using This Control Does This Darker Contrast Control Key A A2300051 Adjusts print contrast from lighter 1 to darker 7 The current setting is marked by an LED Lighter Contrast Control Key V A2300052 Adjusts print contrast from darker 7 to lighter 1 The current setting is marked by an LED Chapter 3 Functional Areas 23 Table 4 Printer Control Panel continued Using This Control Does This Forms Set Left Fold O HC60G034 Indicates that the first fold perforation below the slots on the input forms guide is a left fold If the indicator displays the opposite fold direction or no fold direction press the appropriate key to change the setting Note Use this control only for fan fold forms that are stacked at the printer stacker If the control is not set correctly the stacker jams Forms Set Right Fold O HC60G035 Indicates that the first fold perforation below the slots on the input forms guide is a right fold If the indicator displays the opposite fold direction or no fold direction press the appropriate key to change the setting Note This control is used only for fan fold forms that are stacked at the printer stacker If the control is not set correctly
56. When you adjust the print position of a defined forms identification name the printer automatically stores the new point of origin as part of the current stored definition of that form The point of origin remains in effect even when the printer is powered off until you change it later with the Adjust Print procedure Operate Configure Analyze Options Printer Status Adjust Print Select a Form Name Adjust Amount Horizontal Letter Standard x Cancel Search Ready Check Reset 1 Ensure that the form loaded in the printer is the form selected at the Assign Form to Load window NPRO Cancel Job A2300172 Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 69 2 If the form name in the Assign Form to Load window is not correct SELECT the Search pushbutton to find the form name you want When you have found the correct form name SELECT the OK pushbutton twice to continue the Adjust Print procedure 3 If the target printer is Ready stop the printer by SELECTING the Stop pushbutton on the main Display Touch Screen window of the target printer 4 Display the Adjust Print window by doing one of the following e SELECT the Configure pull down menu and then SELECT Adjust Print OR e SELECT the Options pull down menu SELECT Assign Forms to Load and then SELECT Adjust Print 5 In duplex m
57. Yes No BTS Enabled Yes No Offsetter Installed Yes No Offsetter Enabled Yes No Offset on Mark Forms Yes No 3130 Bar Code Compatibility Yes No Printer Preheat Temperature 45 to 100 C Scan Factory Adjust CE Change Only N A Process Factory Adjust CE Change Only N A Beam 1 Offset CE Change Only 0 0 to 15 9 N A Beam 2 Offset CE Change Only 0 0 to 15 9 N A Beam 3 Offset CE Change Only 0 0 to 15 9 N A Beam 4 Offset CE Change Only 0 0 to 15 9 N A Beam 5 Offset CE Change Only 0 0 to 15 9 N A Machine Sequence CE Change Only N A Manufacturing Plant CE Change Only N A Date and Time CE Change Only N A HOST ATTACHMENTS CONFIGURATION Parallel Channel Parallel Link A Installed Yes No Parallel Link B Installed Yes No Device Address 00 to FF hexadecimal Second Channel Static Dynamic Data Transfer Protocol Interlocked Data Streaming Data Streaming Rate 1 9 2 7 3 4 4 5MB sec Card 1 Slot Position 2 4 Not Installed Automatically set at power on cannot be changed Card 2 Slot Position 2 4 Not Installed Automatically set at power on cannot be changed ESCON Channel Chapter 8 Configuring the System 259 Table 25 Configuration Worksheet Simplex Model continued Item Available Values Selected Value ESCON Link A Installed Yes No ESCON Link B Installed Yes No Device Addr
58. allows accepting or rejecting the Eject to Front Yes or No Facing EFF signals sent by the host A No value will suppress EFFs If Yes the EFF signal from the host will cause a blank page to be inserted between print jobs if the prior job contained an odd number of pages This option should be set to No if either a postprocessing device is installed that bursts and stacks output pages or if Direct Attach is set to Yes Form Definition When selected the form definitions are listed in the order Yes or No Order that they were entered Stacker Enabled This entry allows setting of whether or not the stacker is Yes or No to be used A setting of Yes implies that a postprocessing device is not being used and that fanfold forms not roll feed forms are being used However if a postprocessing device is installed and enabled a Yes value is ignored In duplex mode it refers only to the Printer 2 stacker In dual simplex mode it may refer to either Printer 1 or Printer 2 Chapter 8 Configuring the System 225 Table 16 Printer Configuration Items continued Configuration Item Description Value Options Cut Sheet Emulation Sheets are divided in half using an imaginary line that is parallel to the tractor strips Each resulting half sheet is treated as if it were a whole sheet running through a cut sheet printer None implies the cut sheet emulation is not enabled Normal Left to Right allows
59. applications for use with continuous forms printers able 27 describes possible print quality problems and suggests actions that may correct the symptoms Table 27 Print Quality Symptom Table Symptom Action Repeating spot patterns e If you have been running labels print a test job on plain paper forms to remove any adhesive residue that the labels may have left in the printer Print is too dark or characters appear too wide Press the Lighter Contrast Control key on the printer control panel In duplex printing mode there is a noticeable difference in the printing contrast between the front and back sides of the form even though the Contrast Switch setting is set the same on both printers It is normal for printing contrast to vary between printers Adjust the Contrast setting on the printer control panel of both printers to balance the contrast between the printers Blank spots voids or light areas appear near perforations This problem is usually related to forms design and it cannot be corrected by adjusting the printer The following restrictions copied from the Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers G544 3921 must be maintained Print quality may be poor near fold perforations an internal perforation or any cut in the form To ensure correct operation and print quality maintain the following distances e From non folding and internal perforations 1 27
60. depending on the current state of the printer or printing system Ready makes the complete system both printers Ready when it is in duplex mode or makes the individual printer Ready when the system is in dual simplex mode If pages are waiting to be printed and the system or printer is online to the host printing begins Stop finishes the page that is currently printing It then makes the complete system both printers Not Ready in duplex mode or the individual printer Not Ready in simplex mode Informs the system that the error has been corrected and can return to the Ready status This pushbutton is not active when the printer or printing system is in Ready mode NPRO Next Printer Switches from one simplex printer main window to the other simplex printer main window This pushbutton is available only in dual simplex mode Cancel Job Lets you cancel the job currently being printed In duplex mode both system printers must be in a Not Ready state to cancel a job In simplex mode only the individual printer must be in a Not Ready state See NPRO function 2 Pull Down Menu A pull down menu appears when you select a choice on the Main Window Menu Bar The menu contains a list of functionally grouped procedures shows the pull down menu that you see if you SELECT Operate from the Main Window Menu Bar 3 Procedure Window hapte ask Summa on page 4 available from the pull down menus A procedure window appears
61. displayed When you select this field a pop up window appears containing a selection list box with the additional choices e e e A2600022 Pushbutton or menu item text that is followed by an ellipsis indicates that when you select that item another window appears that requires you to make further selections A2600024 This symbol indicates the presence of a Caution or Warning message A2600017 This symbol indicates that the printer is processing your selection Please wait 42 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Chapter 5 Task Summary The following sections summarize the functions available from the printer pull down menus Figure 10 on page 44 shows all pull down menu procedures It also shows which pull down menu you use to access each procedure Shading indicates the user authorization level that is required of each procedure Copyright IBM Corp 1998 43 cv LOOEZY djeH Jesouay Jeoulbuq Jawojsng Joyeiado Asy sainjeay jelseds s10 213d0 Y 9 4 U014 uaei9s y NOL ayesqueo uaai9s ukaID sajdwes ud abenbue7 ebuey9 piomssed abueyyd S JLIL SACS piomssed seoedl Uld sjuswyoeny a qesiq e qeug aoeiL yun 10u09 n yuo 1S2 JU 13497 uopeznoyny sooelL apow x jdnp ul
62. either e SELECT the No option in the Print While Threading field Then SELECT the Feed to Align pushbutton to finish moving the alignment mark printed on Printer 1 to Printer 2 e Request the host system operator to send more print jobs to the system Periodically SELECT the Feed to Align pushbutton When more data is available forward movement of the forms while printing resumes until the Length of Forms Between Printers distance is achieved When the queued and requested print jobs have satisfied the fixed length forward forms movement visually verify that the dashed alignment mark that is printed on Printer 1 is aligned to the alignment mark on the input station on Printer 2 a If the alignment mark is aligned at Printer 2 check to see if there is a sufficient buffer loop of forms between Printer 1 and the Buffer Flipper Unit If the buffer loop needs to be increased change the Length of Forms Between Transfer Points printer configuration item See the table item on page 223 for more information b If the Printer 1 alignment mark is short of the alignment mark in Printer 2 SELECT the Printer 2 Feed Page pushbutton as many times as necessary until the Printer 1 alignment mark is aligned at Printer 2 c If the Printer 1 alignment mark is past the alignment mark in printer 2 first add some more buffer loop between Printer 1 and the Buffer Flipper Unit by SELECTING the Printer 1 Feed Page pushbutton several times The
63. for later access 2 A record of machine checks device errors and volume statistical data ESCON Enterprise System Connection ESCON channel A channel having an Enterprise Systems Connection channel to control unit I O interface that uses optical cable as a transmission medium ESMM End Select Medium Modification Ethernet A local area network that allows attachments to transmit on the network without prior coordination F fanfold Continuous forms that are alternately folded at regular intervals usually on a perforation Fiber Distributed Data Interface FDDI An ANSI standard for a 100 Mbps LAN using optical fiber cables FLSF Font Library Service Facility fold memory The ability of a form to refold at the fold perforation after exposure to heat during the fusing process fold perforation The perforation on which a form is folded during manufacture and refolded after printing See also page perforation Font Library Service Facility FLSF A licensed program that provides a way to make changes to a font Glossary 299 while retaining its correct format as defined by the architecture and as required by Print Services Facility format 1 The arrangement or layout of data on a data medium 2 The size style type of page margins printing requirements and so on of a printed page FORMDEE Form definition forms The material on which output data is printed such as paper or adhesive labels
64. forms perforation is not aligned correctly do the following a Use the Forms Feed key on the Printer Control Panel to adjust the position of the perforation 3 If you are using the on board stacker ensure that the Forms Set indicator on the Printer Control Panel is set to match the fold direction of the first fold perforation below the perforations on the forms guide 4 If you are doing this procedure as a step in a Printer Error or Intervention Required procedure continue with the steps in that procedure 5 If you are doing this when you load splice or adjust forms SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen window for the affected printer to continue processing 84 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Checking Print Quality Print quality problems are commonly caused by Paper chads in the transfer corona Dirty corona wires Photoconductor scratches Adhesive labels in the forms path or on the photoconductor drum Note Adhesive labels are supported only in simplex mode Check print quality at least once each shift and also when you do any of the following 1 3 Print on labels or preprinted forms Change from one kind of form to another Print bar codes Inspect a sampling of printed output To print a variety of samples do the following a From the Options pull down menu disable attachments by using Enable Disable Attachments b From the Analyze pull down menu on the Display Touch Screen
65. frequently Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 125 126 Jams Between the Printer and a Postprocessing Device Jams or separated forms that occur between the printer and the postprocessing device are not detected and presented as form jams The usual error condition presented is a Pre postprocessor NOT READY line became active D204 message This error message occurs when the Pre postprocessor Busy Timer see details has timed out 1 Clear the forms path of any jam or clear any forms feeding problem between the postprocessing device and the printer 2 SELECT the Check Reset pushbutton on the Printer Error Display Touch Screen window 3 Make the postprocessing device Ready 4 If you have to remove damaged or separated forms in the forms path you must rethread the postprocessing device 5 SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen for the affected printer 6 If you want to reprint pages SELECT the Jam Recovery pushbutton on the Intervention Required window 7 SELECT the Completed pushbutton on the Intervention Required window You do not have to wait between SELECTING the Jam Recovery and Completed pushbuttons 8 SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Recovering from a Forms Jam Duplex Operations This section contains techniques for clearing specific form jams that appear as error messages on the Printer Error window on the
66. from the host system In simplex mode the individual printer is receiving host system data LINE 2 Chapter 10 Responding to Messages 279 Table 29 Printer Status Window Status Field Messages continued Message Description WARMING UP In duplex mode the fuser in one or both system printers is warming up so that print jobs can begin In simplex mode the individual printer fuser is warming SLEEPING In duplex mode the Printer Configuration Fuser Inactivity Timer in one or both system printers has timed out and the fuser has been turned off In simplex mode only the fuser in the individual printer has been turned off NOT AVAILABLE In duplex mode the Display Touch Screen cannot communicate with either or both of the system printers In simplex mode the Display Touch Screen cannot communicate with the individual printer In either duplex or simplex modes when an enabled preprocessing or postprocessing device has been powered off PRINTING In duplex mode the system is printing In simplex mode only the individual printer is printing TRACING In either duplex or simplex modes this indicates that a trace operation is running PRE POSTPROCESSOR BUSY In either duplex or simplex modes this indicates that an enabled preprocessing or postprocessing device is showing Busy status on its interface PRE POSTPROCESSOR NOT READY In either duplex or simplex modes this indica
67. g m 28 Ib when running duplex mode or too moist or have too rough a surface Ensure that no adhesive labels are on the hot roll Print is offset double images If you are printing on labels ensure that the Forms Select switch is set on Plastic If you are not printing on labels try setting the Forms Select switch to 23 42Ibs 72 135kg 83 157g Clean the oiler belt See Ensure that the hot roll shield is up Print is not correctly registered Ensure that the print position is adjusted correctly See Chapter 9 Print Quality and Problem Solving 267 Table 27 Print Quality Symptom Table continued Symptom Action Dark background or dirty prints Clean the printer particularly the coronas and the oiler belt See Cleaning Dark streaks Dark or fuzzy 12 mm 0 5 inch wide This problem may occur at the point where pages stop in the fuser The band across width of page print problem may also be application related and if so cannot be corrected by bloom characters appear bolder or adjusting the printer slightly larger than normal Any other print quality problem or Call your service representative See any of the above problems that persist after you have followed all of the corrective steps Sudden Failures If your printer has been operating satisfactorily for a reasonable period and then suddenly fails consider the following questions e Is
68. interface you are adding SELECT the keyboard OK pushbutton Change the configuration information for the new interface see the next step 4 To change the values that are assigned to an interface do the following a SELECT from the Select a Processor Name selection list box the name of the device interface you want to change The window shows the current values for the device SELECT the field you want to change SELECT the new value you want from the pop up window or enter data on the keypad window and SELECT the OK pushbutton Repeat this step for as many items and devices as you want to change 5 To delete a device do the following a b SELECT from the Select a Processor Name box the name of the device you want to delete from the configured list SELECT the Delete pushbutton 6 SELECT the OK pushbutton on the Configure Pre Postprocessors window when you have finished making all changes to the pre postprocessor configuration 242 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Pre Postprocessor Configuration Values able 23 lists all configuration items what each item is used for and the allowable value options for each item The factory set default values are underlined Table 23 Pre Postprocessor Device Configuration Items Selectable Field Item Description Value Options Printer This item does not appear for simplex models Port When the Configure Printer Printer Mode configuration it
69. is printed on Printer 1 is aligned to the alignment mark on the input station on Printer 2 a If the alignment mark is aligned at Printer 2 check to see if there is a sufficient buffer loop of forms between Printer 1 and the Buffer Flipper Unit If you need to increase the buffer loop change the Length of Forms Between Transfer Points printer configuration item See the table item on page b23 for more information b If the Printer 1 alignment mark is short of the alignment mark in Printer 2 SELECT the Printer 2 Feed Page pushbutton as many times as necessary until the Printer 1 alignment mark is aligned at Printer 2 c If the Printer 1 alignment mark is past the alignment mark in printer 2 first add some more buffer loop between Printer 1 and the Buffer Flipper Unit by SELECTING the Printer 1 Feed Page pushbutton several times Then SELECT the Cancel pushbutton on the window You must now restart this Thread Align Forms procedure Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 159 8 After you have visually verified that the Printer 1 alignment mark is aligned correctly on Printer 2 SELECT the Mark is Aligned pushbutton on the window At the Verification window SELECT the OK pushbutton This informs the control unit that the alignment is complete m Important If your visual verification of alignment is incorrect all following duplex print jobs are printed with incorrect alignment between the front and back of the pages
70. languages you can select Each language has its native spelling and accent marks Operate Configure Analyze Options Change Language Select a Language English Spanish French German Japanese lt Start Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job 3 SELECT a new language from the list In dual simplex mode the language applies to the Display Touch Screen windows for both printers A2300092 4 SELECT the Change pushbutton You see a Language Change Warning prompting window Some language changes automatically shutdown and restart the system 5 SELECT the OK pushbutton to change the language 218 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Configuring the Printer This procedure lets you view update or print a copy of the printer configuration Note The printer can have multiple sets of configuration data one for each mode in which the printer can operate To update a configuration for a particular mode the printer must be running in that mode 1 Before you print the printer configuration ensure that all attachments are disabled See a g 2 2 information You do not need to disable attachments if you are viewing or changing the configuration 2 To access the configuration settings do one of the following e In simplex or duplex mode SELECT the Configure pull down menu e In dual simplex mode SELECT the Configure pull down me
71. mix inlet 21 printer modes switching from dual simplex or duplex 172 printing labels 72 73 position 72 73 problems print quality 85 procedure window helps 53 program check messages 272 pull down menus analyze 49 configure 47 Help 52 operate 45 options 50 puller 15 puller lever 26 pushbuttons description of 37 developer run 20 Forward 24 left fold 24 Reverse 24 right fold 24 TABLE 29 toner supply 20 R radio buttons 38 Ready Main Window pushbutton 34 307 Index Ready Operate procedure 45 ready status 11 rear service area 32 recovering from forms jams duplex operations forms are not jammed torn or separated 130 jam between printer 1 and printer 2 134 jams between the printer and a postprocessing device 134 jams within printer 1 129 jams within printer 2 131 procedures duplex mode 127 134 recovering from forms jams simplex operations forms are jammed torn or separated 123 forms are not jammed torn or separated 124 jams between postprocessing 126 prevention suggestions 144 procedures 126 procedures simplex mode 121 126 transfer station area 136 within the printer engine 122 recovery jam 119 reduced print quality 266 reducing print quality 29 registration 68 remote access configuring 245 Remote Channel Enable Disable feature 63 Remote Control Unit Power switch 18 56 Remote Management Interface RMI 245 Remote Printer Power switch 18 56 repeating messages 269 repeating spot pa
72. mm 0 05 in e From folding perforations 1 27 mm 0 05 in e From binder holes and cuts 2 54 mm 0 1 in If the specified distance from the page perforations is not being maintained refer the application owner to the Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers G544 3921 Loss of edge definition or lighter print contrast boldness at the trailing edge of bar codes shaded or solid fill areas or formatted bold text characters The problem can be reduced or eliminated by increasing the Contrast switch setting on the printer control panel Remember to adjust the contrast setting on both printers when they are in duplex mode This balances the contrast between the front and back of the forms 266 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Table 27 Print Quality Symptom Table continued Symptom Action Blank spots voids or light areas not near perforations Ensure that the forms are smooth and flat Feel the forms especially near the perforation If you find lumps bumps or wrinkles load another box of forms This kind of problem can be caused by storing forms in a poor environment for example high humidity If you have been running labels print a test job on plain paper forms to remove any adhesive residue that the labels may have left in the printer Clean the coronas See step D4 on page 95 in Cleaning the Printer a Press the Darker Contrast Control key on the printer c
73. paper towels on the floor beneath the oiler belt gate Chapter 7 Ordering and Replacing Supplies 205 aa att ie oe ui CHS i ca i i Wt itn mi D ue a at a HC60G051 4 Open the oiler belt gate 5 Allow the printer to cool for at least 30 minutes 6 Lower the hot roll shield 206 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide 09 t e 0 ie O x 7 If you are changing the oiler belt and the oil pan_that is shown above is present do the following Otherwise go to step a Remove the oil pan by lifting the pan until the hooked portion is disengaged from the lower oiler belt support shaft b Check to see if the absorbent pad is saturated with oil If the pad is saturated continue with the next step If it is not saturated go to step c Remove the new absorbent pad from the plastic shipping bag d Remove the saturated absorbent pad from the oil pan e Place the saturated pad in the plastic shipping bag and discard the bag in an approved waste container f Install the new absorbent pad in the oil pan Chapter 7 Ordering and Replacing Supplies 207 8 Grasp both ends of the upper oiler belt roll and move it to the right against the spring NWTO0146 9 Pull out the upper oiler belt roll left end first 208 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide
74. preprocessing device and has a postprocessing device installed and enabled Forms enter from the right under the printer to the urge unit and then move up through the Forms Input area 6 The stacker is disabled and forms exit the printer to the left directly to the postprocessing device 5 e Note the following differences when you use a printer for duplex or simplex printing If the printer is Printer 1 in the configuration the stacker is disabled The forms exit the printer to the left from the Output Stacker Area 4 directly to the Buffer Flipper Unit If a preprocessing device is installed the forms enter from the right under the printer to the urge unit and then move up through the Forms Input area 6 If the printer is Printer 2 the forms enter from the right under the printer through an Urge Unit that is placed on the floor in the Forms Input area 6 The forms then move up through the Forms Input area If a postprocessing device is installed and enabled the stacker is disabled and the forms exit the printer to the left directly to the postprocessing device 5 16 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Control Unit Area The Display Touch Screen power control panel and the operator alert assembly are in the control unit area HC60G054 1 Operator Alert Assembly 2 Display Touch Screen 3 Power Control Panel 4 AFCCU Frame in a simplex printer or
75. presented in order of importance or frequency of use Notes to the Operator 1 In some cases the tasks described in this chapter correspond directly to the action messages you see on the Display Touch Screen windows 2 The instructions in this section describe exactly how to do each step They also include tips to help you prevent common problems Before you begin an unfamiliar task read all the information Then carefully follow the step by step instructions 3 For information about other operator tasks see Controlling the System Power The following figure shows a Power Control Panel tee pemele Power Power Off Unit Power Local On If In Local Emergency Power Enable Printer Remote Power Power Off Power Poca On If In Local O Power Off A2300062 Printer 1 in a duplex or dual simplex printing system has two sets of power controls One is for the Printer Utility Module PUM frame which is labeled Control Unit on the Power Control Panel The other is for the printer that is attached to the PUM frame Printer 2 in a duplex system and a simplex only printer also has two sets of power controls One is for the Advanced Function Common Control Unit AFCCU frame which is labeled Control Unit on the Power Control Panel The other is for the printer that is attached to the AFCCU frame Each element in the system Printer 1 frame
76. print resolution configuration The Printhead Resolution window appears listing the valid dots per inch DPI resolution numbers SELECT the appropriate resolution number If you select 600 DPI another window appears This window shows the current IPDS resolution Select the desired IPDS resolution If you select 480 DPI or 600 DPI in combination with 240 300 600 or Auto IPDS resolution the Enhanced Fonts window appears You must select Yes or No for Single byte and Double byte Font Enhancements SELECT the OK pushbutton on the Configure Printer window The print resolution is now at the number you selected InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Chapter 7 Ordering and Replacing Supplies Supplies IBM Supplies Worksheet Ordering Supplies Maintenance Supply Tiems Customer Replaceable Supply Items Warranty Returns Storing Supplies Adding Fuser Oil 176 176 177 177 177 178 178 179 Changing the Toner Cartridge Checking the Toner Collector Changing the Toner Collector Changing the Developer Mix Checking the Fine Filter Changing the Fine Filter Changing the Oiler Belt Checking the Absorbent Pad in the Oil Pan 182 186 188 191 200 201 204 lt 212 This section describes how to order and replace supplies Tasks in this section are presented in an arbitrary order not in order of importance or frequency of use A message appears on an Display Touch Screen window when it is time to replac
77. programs Contrast with system programmer ARQ Active record queue ASCII American National Standard Code for Information Interchange ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers B bar code A code representing characters by sets of parallel bars of varying thickness and separation that are read optically by transverse scanning basis weight The weight in pounds of a ream 500 sheets of paper cut to a given standard size for that grade for example 25 x 38 inches for book papers 17 x 22 inches for bond papers and other sizes for other grades The basis weight of continuous forms for computer output is based on the size for bond papers BCOCA Bar Code Object Content Architecture binder holes A series of holes or slots punched at set intervals that allows the form to be inserted in a loose leaf or ring binder bond paper Paper formulated with at least 80 wood pulp Bond paper forms work best in the InfoPrint 3000 BTS Burster Trimmer Stacker C calender A process to make paper smooth or glossy by passing it through a series of metal rollers during the last steps of a paper making machine calender cut Slits glazed lines or discolored lines across the paper caused when wrinkles pass through the calender rollers 297 caliper The thickness of forms This is usually expressed in thousandths of an inch carrier The backing material for labels Labels consi
78. same as physically attaching or detaching the attachment To accept commands and data from the system a controlling computer system channel must be enabled and the printer must be Ready You need to enable attachments whenever you do the following e Switch power on to the system in duplex e Switch power on to the system in dual simplex e Switch power on to the system in simplex mode without using Auto Start e Whenever you need to enable a disabled attachment The enable disable status of installed host attachments may be set differently between duplex and dual simplex modes and between Printer 1 and Printer 2 in dual simplex Remote Channel Enable Disable If your installation uses two System 370 Parallel Channels a Remote Channel Enable Disable feature may be installed contact your service representative if you are not sure If the Remote Channel Enable Disable feature is installed you must notify the remote operator whenever you require the Parallel channels to be enabled or disabled Note Although there is nothing to prohibit the use of the Enable Disable Attachments procedure you should not use it when the Remote Channel Enable Disable feature is installed Local Channel Enable Disable Note Do not use this procedure if the Remote Channel Enable Disable feature is installed The enable disable status of host attachments cannot be changed for an individual printer or for the complete two printer
79. system unless the printers are in the Not Ready state You may make the printers Not Ready at either the printer Display Touch Screen window or the stacker control panel You must use that same panel or window to make the printers Ready e In duplex mode SELECT the Stop pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen main window e In dual simplex mode SELECT the Stop pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen window for the target printer e In simplex mode SELECT the Stop pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen window for the printer Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 63 i Operate Configure Analyze Options Enable Disable Attachments Select an Installed Attachment Parallel Channel Enabled ESCON Channel Disabled V Close Enable Disable Help Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job A2300121 Enabling a Host Attachment 1 From the Options pull down menu SELECT the Enable Disable Attachments procedure From the list of currently installed attachments SELECT the attachment you want to enable then SELECT the Enable pushbutton Make the printers Ready e In duplex mode SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen main window e In dual simplex mode SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the target printer Display Touch Screen window e In simplex mode SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Sc
80. terms that have a similar but not synonymous meaning A ABIC Adaptive Bilevel Image Compression adhesive label Special application material typically consists of paper labels coated on one side with an adhesive mixture temporarily affixed to backing material See also carrier Advanced Function Common Control Unit AFCCU An IBM RISC based control unit with code common to all printers that use the AFCCU Advanced Function Image and Graphics RPQ An optional feature for adding the capability for the InfoPrint 3000 to directly process IO1 image and DR2 vector graphics data streams AEA Alternate exception action AFCCU AFIG Advanced Function Image and Graphics AFP 1 Advanced Function Printing 2 Advanced Function Presentation AFPF Advanced Function Print Finishing all points addressability APA The capability to address reference and position text overlays and images at any defined point on the printable area of a page ANSI American National Standards Institute Copyright IBM Corp 1998 APA All points addressable application The use to which an information processing system is put for example a payroll application an airline reservation application a network application application program A program written for or by a user that applies to the user s work such as a program that does inventory control or payroll application programmer A person who develops application
81. the Main Window Note Although most of the artwork in this book shows a Display Touch Screen that is in duplex mode the simplex mode Display Touch Screen looks virtually the same Copyright IBM Corp 1998 33 Display Touch Screen Windows Figure 4 shows a sample Display Touch Screen window and its components Operate Configure Analyze Options 2 Ready Printer Status LA 1 Stop Attachments Printer Status Cancel Job Clear Buffers Thread Align Forms Parallel Channel A Disabled Parallel Channel B Disabled 3 Messages Printer Error D205 NPRO NPRO Page Shutdown Restart Ready ae NPRO Cancel Job HC60G086 Figure 4 Display Touch Screen Window Components 1 Main Window The Main Window always appears on the Display Touch Screen All of the other pull down menus procedure windows keyboard and keypad windows and pop up windows appear on top of it The Main Window contains the following e A Title Bar which lists the name of the printer and the current authorization level of Key Operator or Customer Engineer e A Menu Bar which lists the five pull down menus you can use Operate Configure Analyze Options and Help e Pushbuttons which let you access frequently used procedures Ready Stop Check Reset 34 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Acts as a toggle between Ready and Stop
82. the Define Forms window which lists the forms that are currently defined and information about the form name that is highlighted in the list Note The Define Forms function is not available if the Assign Forms to Load or Print Adjust screen is displayed Only one of these three screens appears at any time Chapter 8 Configuring the System 247 Operate Configure Analyze Options Select a Form Name Width Form Description Letter A 12 00 l Standard 8 5 x 12 in Standard Length a Form Characteristics 12x18 gt Unit Vv in Search Omm hyd Cancel OK New Form Delete Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job Figure 36 Define Forms Window Duplex Mode A2300082 4 To find a particular form name SELECT the Search pushbutton A keyboard appears so you can enter the form name Note Use care when you define a form name Searching for form names is case sensitive that is if capitol letters are used to define the form you must use them to enter the form name for a search 5 To delete a form do the following a SELECT the form you want to delete from the list b SELECT the Delete pushbutton Note You cannot delete the last remaining Form Name or the loaded Form Name To rename the last defined form you must use the New Form pushbutton to add a new Form Name and then delete th
83. the conditions you want from the Select a Starting Condition box on the window Your choice is highlighted The conditions you can select on this window are e Forms are threaded through both printers Select this when 152 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide The system has gone through a Restart procedure with forms that are loaded through both printers You are in a recovery procedure for an error condition or a forms jam that did not tear damage or separate the forms in the forms path through both printers The system power was switched off and then switched back on with unseparated forms threaded through both printers e Forms are not loaded in printer 2 Select this when You are loading a new type of form with different characteristics from the last form that you used in the system You are loading the same type of form that you previously used in the system it was allowed to run out to end of forms and it was flushed out of the printer so that a new supply of forms could not be spliced to the trailing edge of the old supply You are in a forms jam recovery procedure that separated the forms in a manner that you could not rejoin by splicing e Forms are broken between the printers Select this when you are recovering from a condition that separated the forms between Printer 1 and Printer 2 that you can rejoin by splicing 2 If you SELECT the Cancel pushbutton on the window the following actions occur
84. the front edge of the toner hopper 7 Pull the old cartridge out onto the cardboard tray carefully to prevent toner from spilling 8 Place the old cartridge and cardboard tray into the carton Set aside for disposal If pan fea W l HC60G012 9 Insert the new toner cartridge with the tab of the seal facing you into the hopper 10 Fold the tab down 184 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide 15 16 HC60G037 Close the toner cartridge latch 1 carton lid under the upper lips of the toner hopper Remove the cartridge seal from the toner cartridge by firmly pulling on the tab and rolling it under the seal until the seal is completely removed Place the rolled seal in the carton lid HC60G013 Remove the carton lid from the toner hopper Discard the carton lid the cartridge seal and the carton with the used toner cartridge Clean any spilled toner 88 to change the toner collector Chapter 7 Ordering and Replacing Supplies Place the carton lid on the lower lip of the toner hopper with the edge of the 185 Checking the Toner Collector Attention You must do this task immediately Do not switch power off to the printer during this procedure Do this task when you see the following message cecx TONER COLLECTOR 0787 Ney HC60G031 1 From the
85. the hose o ro 10 Q O j a 10 Press the Developer Run Pushbutton A 1 one time to ensure that all of the developer mix is drained There should be about 1 8 liters of used developer mix in the bottle 196 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide HC60G017 11 When the developer stops running close the developer drain by pushing the Developer Drain Lever B downward and then pushing it in 12 Once the developer mix has finished draining ensure that no developer mix remains in the drain hose Do this by shaking the hose vigorously while you hold the hose as vertical as possible 13 Remove the developer drain hose from the bottle Put the cap on the developer drain hose and return the hose to its recessed storage area 14 Put the cap on the bottle Discard the bottle and its contents m Attention To prevent print quality problems never reuse waste developer mix Never put anything other than new developer mix into the developer mix inlet 15 Remove the cap from the new developer mix bottle HC60G019 16 Remove the developer inlet cover Chapter 7 Ordering and Replacing Supplies 197 17 Clean the cover to remove any excess developer mix and put it in a safe place Important Ensure that the developer drain is closed HC60G021 18 Press the Developer Run Pushbutton A and slowly pour the developer mix into the inlet If the developer stops running before the n
86. the host printing begins Stop Finishes the page that is currently printing It then makes the complete system both printers Not Ready in duplex mode or the individual printer Not Ready in simplex or dual simplex mode Printer Status Displays status information about the system or printer See Messages on page 27 for more information Cancel Job Lets you cancel the job that is currently printing In simplex or dual simplex mode only the individual printer must be in a Not Ready state 8 for more information Clear Buffers Clears the print buffers You must make the printer Not Ready before you select Clear Buffers This procedure allows the host to use PSF Forward and Backward commands Thread Align Forms Establishes the front to back synchronization in a two printer system This Sarl is available only in duplex mode See a 2 for more information Chapter 5 Task Summary 45 NPRO Page Moves the forms forward to the next top of form position See Advancing information Shutdown Restart Lets you shutdown or restart the printers e Shutdown closes all of the active procedures disables host attachments and safely prepares the system so that you can power off the control unit In duplex mode Shutdown affects the complete system In simplex or dual simplex mode Shutdown applies to just the printer for which the procedure was selected You can still use the other printer e Restart unloads and
87. the keypad to type the correct value e On the keypad window SELECT the OK pushbutton c On the Print Test window SELECT the OK pushbutton 7 Look at the pages just printed located above the transfer station to determine how much to adjust the print position 70 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Things To Keep In Mind When You Adjust the Print Position Print jobs with data closer than 20 mm about 1 inch to the fold perforation or from the edges of the forms do not have the full adjustment range For example if the job has data that prints 10 mm about inch from the fold perforation the maximum amount that image can be shifted is 10 mm inch toward the page perforation If you attempt a larger vertical adjustment Print Error Marker PEMs which the host system turns on or off can occur O V 480 A fi c t V 0 O S t H 0 O F Z O H 480 480 9 2 QOI 480 8 g 2 Figure 21 Factory Set Default Registration Note The horizontal H and vertical V values vary depending on the print resolution PEL that you selected for the printer How This Procedure Works Doing this procedure lets you change the point of origin on a page by adding to or subtracting from the vertical and horizontal starting positions Figure 21 illustrates the default point of origin vertical 0 horizontal 0 It also shows the range of possible adjustments which are not drawn to scale when the print resolut
88. the print data to be placed on the left half sheet first and then the right half sheet The left half sheet is closest to the operator The physical orientation of the data is based on the lower left corner of the paper as viewed from the operator s viewpoint Normal Right to Left allows the print data to be placed on the right half sheet first and then the left half sheet The right half sheet is furthest from the operator The physical orientation of the data is based on the lower left corner of the paper as viewed from the operator s viewpoint Inverted Left to Right allows the print data to be placed on the left half sheet first and then the right half sheet The left half sheet is furthest from the operator The physical orientation of the data is based on the upper right corner of the paper as viewed from the operator s viewpoint This mode is the upside down version of the Normal Left to Right mode Inverted Right to Left allows the print data to be placed on the right half sheet first and then the left half sheet The right half sheet is closest to the operator The physical orientation of the data is based on the upper right corner of the paper as viewed from the operator s viewpoint This mode is the upside down version of the Normal Right to Left mode None Normal Left to Right Normal Right to Left Inverted Left to Right Inverted Right to Left BTS Installed This entry allows setting whether a Burster
89. the printer processing a new application e Is the printer using new forms e Are forms or other supplies being obtained from a new supplier e Have the IBM Advanced Function Printing licensed programs been updated e Have any changes occurred in the operating system environment e Has the printer been recabled or moved e Have any configuration items been changed recently If the answer to any of these questions is yes you may have found the cause of the problem Work with your system programmer service representative or application owner to resolve the situation 268 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Problem Solving Tips and Suggested Actions able 29 is a summary of some hard to classify symptoms a discussion of the probable cause and some actions for you to try Table 28 Miscellaneous Problems Symptom The printer frequently jams during loading Discussion Loading problems are usually caused by the forms that are being loaded If a particular form jams frequently refer the application owner to the Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers G544 3921 This book contains detailed information about selecting forms and designing applications for use with a continuous forms printer Suggested Action e Ensure that the folded or leading edge of the form is not wrinkled or torn If the first page is folded under ensure that the tractor holes line up exactly If you a
90. the term is first defined in the publication For example The term forms path refers to the entire route that the forms travel Pictorial Conventions Most artwork in this publication shows a InfoPrint 3000 Model ES1 printer XXVi InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide InfoPrint 3000 Library The following additional InfoPrint 3000 publications are available e InfoPrint 3000 Introduction and Planning Guide G544 5563 summarizes the InfoPrint 3000 functions and describes how to plan for a successful installation e Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers G544 3921 describes the characteristics of forms and special use media and describes their effects on printer s performance e IPDS Handbook for Printers That Use the Advanced Function Common Control Unit G544 3895 which contains technical information about the host to printer data stream and exception reporting e InfoPrint 3000 Maintenance Information Manuals IBM Part Number 2414856 which contain technical information about maintaining and repairing the printers Related Publications An extensive listing of available publications is included in Advanced Function Presentation Printer Information G544 3290 For more information about Advanced Function Presentation refer to Guide to Advanced Function Presentation G544 3876 Contact your IBM marketing representative for information concerning either the printer its manuals or its assoc
91. to the problem The service representative always needs the following information e The number and exact text of each message listed in the order of their appearance on the Display Touch Screen e A description of the forms that are used size weight adhesive labels and preprinted forms Also the following optional information may be useful e A description of the application that was running e A description of the operating environment e A summary of all the operator actions that were taken e Print samples 3 Follow your site procedures for reporting problems For example you may need to notify the shift supervisor or the system programmer before you request a service call Chapter 2 Operator s Overview 13 14 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Chapter 3 Functional Areas This chapter describes the forms path of the printer It also provides a graphic overview of the functional areas of the printer which include e Advanced Function Common Control AFCCU area Operator alert area Power control panel Display Touch Screen Keep In Mind 1 The AFCCU is physically attached to a simplex printer or Printer 2 in a duplex or dual simplex configuration 2 The Printer Utility Module PUM is physically attached to Printer 1 in a duplex or dual simplex configuration Except for a Display Touch Screen the PUM is identical to an AFCCU frame from your perspective e Developer area e Forms input and transfe
92. to this counter which will then become a new base count in the running Printer 2 Counter displayed in the Printer Status Display Touch Screen window 0 to 2 000 000 000 Printhead resolution This parameter changes the resolution that the printhead in this printer uses Not all values are supported on all printers Valid values are 480 or 600 DPI The value you select depends on what features are installed on the printer IPDS Resolution This parameter can only be set when a printhead resolution of 600 DPI is selected Automatic 240 DPI 300 DPI or 600 DPI Font Enhancement This parameter is used to activate or deactivate the edge smoothing algorithm for raster fonts Set to No if edge smoothing is not desired Yes or No Jam Recovery Type This entry controls under what conditions the host system will automatically retransmit pages after a forms jam has been cleared e Normal Jam Repositioning All lost pages are automatically retransmitted and reprinted e Suppress All Jam Repositioning No lost pages will be retransmitted Any missing or damaged pages must be manually recovered e Use Normal Jam Repositioning e Suppress All Jam Repositioning Chapter 8 Configuring the System 221 Table 16 Printer Configuration Items continued Configuration Item Description Value Options Font Usage Font usage allows you to select the amount of memory that the print
93. warranties so the above exclusion may not apply to you Your failure to comply with the terms above terminates this authorization Upon termination you must destroy your machine readable documentation Copyright IBM Corp 1998 iii iv InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Contents Online Documentation Authorization Figures Tables Statement of Limited Warranty Production Status The IBM Warranty Warranty Service Extent of Warranty Limitation of Liability Notices Trademarks Communication Statements Safety Notice Conventions Caution Notices Danger Notices Safety Notices Preface About This Book How to Use This Book Terminology Notation Conventions Pictorial Conventions InfoPrint 3000 Library Related Publications Summary of Changes Chapter 1 Introduction System Characteristics Printer Characteristics System Components Duplex Printing Applications Simplex and Dual Simplex Printing Applications Inline Configuration for Duplex Left Angle Configuration for Duplex Left Angle Configuration for Dual Simplex Chapter 2 Operator s Overview Operator Responsibilities Normal Operation Ready Status Operator Intervention Not Ready Status Service Call Procedure Chapter 3 Functional Areas Forms and the Forms Path Control Unit Area Operator Alert Area Display Touch Screen Copyright IBM Corp 1998 xi Xiii xiii xiii xiv xiv XV XV xvi
94. when you select a procedure from a pull down menu A procedure window provides you with all of the lists options and pushbuttons you need to accomplish a defined procedure shows the procedure window you see when you select the Printer Status procedure from the Operate pull down menu shows all pull down menu procedures It also shows which pull down menu you use to access each procedure Shading indicates the user authorization level that is required of each procedure j summarizes all of the functions Keyboard Keypad and Hexpad Windows You see a keyboard Figure 6 on page 37 keypad Figure 5 on page 34 or hexpad window when a procedure requires you to enter numeric or alphanumeric data The title bar on these windows contains the same title as the procedure window The following function and cursor control keys are on each type of keyboard or keypad OK Clear Cancel Help Insert Removes the keyboard or keypad window and displays the new value that you entered in the procedure window selectable field item that called it Clears the input from the entry field if you make a mistake and allows you to start over Cancels any entries you have made and removes the window Displays a help window that describes how the keyboard window works Acts as a toggle switch between Insert and Overwrite modes Either the word Insert or Overwrite appears at the right side of the entry field Chapt
95. 0 H 6 8 x Figure 22 Sample Field Adjusted Registration Note The horizontal H and vertical V values vary depending on the print resolution PEL that you selected for the printer Operator Tips e Once you have determined the adjustments for a particular form you can make a note of the adjustment values on the e Be aware that occasionally some maintenance procedures can affect print position adjustment If this happens adjust the print position as needed 8 To make a horizontal adjustment do the following a SELECT the Horizontal Adjust Amount field This displays a keypad window b Use the pushbutton on the keypad window to set the sign of the change you will make c Enter the new value then SELECT the OK pushbutton to return to the Adjust Print window 72 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Operator Tips e When you increase the horizontal value by one you move the origin toward the right side of the form by one pel e When you decrease the horizontal value by one you move the origin toward the left side of the form by one pel 9 To make a vertical adjustment do the following a SELECT the Vertical Adjust Amount field This displays a keypad window b Use the pushbutton on the keypad window to set the sign of the change you will make c Enter the new value then SELECT the OK pushbutton to return to the Adjust Print window m Operator Tips e Wh
96. 01 to 65536 Notes 1 Only one address is required for operating a simplex system 2 If your installation runs in dual simplex and duplex mode specify the same TCP Port value for duplex mode as you do for Printer 1 in dual simplex mode IBM recommends using the default value of 5001 Also make sure you specify a unique value for Printer 2 in simplex mode Printer 1 and Printer 2 cannot use the same value If you use the default value of 5001 for Printer 1 IBM recommends using 5002 as the value for Printer 2 3 The TCP Port numbers specified in the printer configuration must match the PORT numbers assigned in the host PSF system 4 Because Printer 1 in a dual simplex system and the complete system in duplex system share a common port number operational procedures must be defined to distinguish between duplex and dual simplex printing The easiest way to manage this is to assign separate queues for duplex versus dual simplex output for PSF 2 and PSF 6000 and to assign at least a unique job class for duplex jobs for S 390 host PSF systems IP Address Specifies the Internet protocol IP address of the printer X X X X where X lt 255 in dotted decimal format Get this value from your LAN administrator This value must match the IP address value in the host PSF configuration This value is unique to a duplex system and is the same regardless of whether the printer is in duplex or dual simplex mode Subnet Mask
97. 1 You can define form lengths in one sixth of an inch increments at the Display Touch Screen For reference see 81 3 and 82 3 above The stacker control panel does not allow form lengths in one sixth of an inch The smallest increment allowed on the stacker control panel is one third of an inch 2 Setting equals forms length as measured from fold perforation to fold perforation 3 Form lengths as prefolded greater than 14 0 inches are permissible if the stacker is disabled and a postprocessing device is installed and enabled Copyright IBM Corp 1998 291 292 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Appendix B Physical System Layouts Simplex Models The dimensions of the InfoPrint 3000 simplex printers the service clearance around the allowable configurations of these units and the power cable and channel cable locations are shown in Note The minimum size of the Channel Cable Access opening is 200 x 200 mm 8 x 8 in 1574 inal kasil 62 T ry Maintenance Area 1486 gt h 59 jj la 533 gt 21 699 28 28 975 Channel 38 Cable 864 Access lt 3 _ 34 ig 4 of 4 Y 4 914 36 3032 120 le eo eft te t ti _ 4 maf o 1143 45 2019 864 80 34 k 2107 gt 83 Y y lig 3747 Al 148 Inch measurements are Leveling Pad s i shown in parentheses Power Cable 8
98. 1213 Abort Name mic_model Additional Information soft abort Restart Cancel Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job Figure 37 Soft Program Check Window Save Help A2300141 e SELECT the Save pushbutton to save all existing trace data to diskette if desired e SELECT the Cancel pushbutton If the window is removed retry the operation in progress when the Program Check condition occurred e If the window reappears SELECT the Restart pushbutton e At the completion of the Restart procedure retry the operation in progress when the Program Check condition occurred e Call for service if the problem continues 272 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Hard Program Checks Hard Program Check Abort Source 0X0002 Abort ID 0X0011 Abort Name afccuMain Hex Data None Additional Information Subsystem 2 console terminate by signal SIGKILL KILL Shutdown Restart Save Traces A2300137 J Figure 38 Hard Program Check Window Normal Operations For a Hard Program Check that occurs during either a power on bring up sequence or normal operations do the following SELECT the Save Traces pushbutton to save all existing trace data to diskette if desired SELECT the Restart pushbutton If the window does not reappear after the completion of the Restart procedure retry the operation in progress when the Program Check condition occurred
99. 26 hot roll shield 87 icons developer mix inlet 21 IMLing the printer 61 inactive items 38 indicators left fold 24 right fold 24 intervention required messages 277 irregular speed forms 270 J jam prevention suggestions 144 jam recovery 119 fuser 129 fuser area 140 pendulum area 143 skew error 123 124 129 130 131 132 stacker 125 suggestions 144 tractor jam 123 transfer station area 136 upper tractor 129 130 131 132 within the printer engine 122 jobs canceling 78 K key operator password protection 79 keyboard symbol 41 keyboard window 35 keypad Forms Select 29 symbol 41 keypad window 35 keys description of 37 developer run 20 Forward 24 left fold 24 Reverse 24 right fold 24 TABLE 29 toner supply 20 knobs FORMS LENGTH 30 L labels printing 72 73 labels printing 72 73 language changing for Display Touch Screen 218 laser 15 left fold indicator and key 24 lever operator control developer drain 20 FORMS WIDTH 30 tractor control 25 transfer station control 25 Lexmark International 177 light areas 267 light print 267 load forms load 102 Local Control Unit Power switch 18 56 local controlled mode 59 Local Printer Power switch 18 56 Local Remote switch power 19 Main Window Display Touch Screen 34 menus analyze 49 configure 47 Help 52 operate 45 options 50 message displayed too long 269 messages and codes hard program checks 273 intervention requi
100. 3 print preprinted forms 72 73 print position 68 vertical print 73 volume operator alert 74 alarm does not sound 270 analyze pull down menu 49 attachments configuring 229 disabling 63 enabling 63 authorization level changing 79 auto load jams 269 belt oiler 177 changing 204 cleaning 86 204 gate 87 206 213 hot roll shield 87 210 215 location of 26 message 204 new belt 204 oil pan absorbent pad 212 roll 208 blank areas 267 blank Display Touch Screen display 269 bloom print 268 brush corona 91 brush static discharge 93 buffer flipper unit threading 167 C cable locations 293 call for service procedure 13 Cancel Job Main Window pushbutton 35 canceling print jobs 78 changing absorbent pad in oil pan 212 attachments configuration 229 developer mix 191 Display Touch Screen language 218 Copyright IBM Corp 1998 changing continued duplex to simplex mode 220 ESCON channels configuration 234 Ethernet attachments 237 FDDI attachments 239 fine filter 201 forms definitions 247 oiler belt 204 operator authorization level 79 parallel channels configuration 232 password 79 preprocessing postprocessing device configuration 241 printer configuration 219 printer mode 172 220 simplex to duplex mode 220 token ring attachments 235 toner collector 188 channel cable locations 293 characteristics printer 3 summary 3 system 1 check collector toner 186 checking fine filt
101. 4 276 277 278 279 280 Appendix A Valid Form a in Inches 291 Appendix B em Ee vous 293 Simplex Models so 293 Duplex Models 294 Glossary 297 Index Readers Comments We d Like to Hear from You Contents 305 311 vii viii InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Figures BAO es Go Bk Forms Path Through a Printer Engine Stacker Control Panel Stacker Height Control Display Touch Screen Window Components Numeric Keypad Window Alphanumeric Keyboard Window Grayed Out Check Reset Pushbutton System Menu Symbol Pull Down Menu Procedure Windows in Cascade Format Procedure Access Chart Operate Pull Down Menu Configure Pull Down Menu Analyze Pull Down Menu Options Pull Down Menu General Help Window Define Forms Help Window Operator Console User Controls On Screen Display Main Menu Good Registration ae Poor Registration Factory Set Default Registration 3 Sample Field Adjusted Registration Options Pull Down Menu Stacker Height Control Copyright IBM Corp 1998 16 28 31 36 37 38 39 40 44 45 47 49 50 52 53 65 66 68 69 71 72 80 117 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 Reprint Path Length Duplex Mode Reprint Path Length Reestablishing Forms Alignment Printer Usage Sheet Traces Window
102. 5 Configuration Worksheet Simplex Model continued Item Available Values Name 1 to 12 alphanumeric characters including spaces Type e Coupled Preprocessor e Coupled Postprocessor e Advanced Postprocessor MICR e Advanced Postprocessor SMM Select Medium Modification Characteristics Pre Postprocessor Extended NPRO 0 to 800 inches Pre Postprocessor Busy Timer 1 to 999 seconds Postprocessor Tag Type Coupled e RSI Compatible Distance to Postprocessor e 24 to 800 inches e 24 to 1200 inches Postprocessor Error Page Stop 0 to 50 pages Postprocessor Verify Alignment Page Stop 0 to 5000 pages Characteristics Pre Postprocessor Baud Rate in Kbps 19 2 or 62 5 DEVICE Number Port Number 1 2 3 Enabled Yes No Name 1 to 12 alphanumeric characters including spaces Type e Coupled Preprocessor e Coupled Postprocessor e Advanced Postprocessor MICR e Advanced Postprocessor SMM Select Medium Modification Pre Postprocessor Extended NPRO Pre Postprocessor Busy Timer 0 to 800 inches 1 to 999 seconds Postprocessor Tag Type e Coupled e RSI Compatible Distance to Postprocessor e 24 to 800 inches e 24 to 1200 inches Postprocessor Error Page Stop 0 to 50 pages Postprocessor Verify Alignment Page Stop 0 to 5000 pages Pre Postprocessor Baud Rate in Kbps 19 2 or 62
103. 9 9 457 18 76 2 0 3 3 0 356 0 3 14 0 4 480 600 3 7 0 013 0 013 8 Dual Simplex 780 600 112 172 60 160 16 42 204 8 457 18 Notes 0 p A E S Optional feature Print Speed stated in 1 up mode 2 up mode See notes 5 and 6 for more information The Print speed for Duplex is the total system speed 2 printers The Print speed for dual simplex lists individual printer speed either Printer 1 or Printer 2 Standard resolution specify feature 1 up mode assuming an 8 inch length page measured in the forms process direction 2 up mode assuming an 11 inch length page measured in the forms process direction The maximum paper weight for duplex printers running in simplex mode should be 160 g m 42 Ib Maximum form length is 356 0 3 mm 14 0 013 in when used with the on board stacker Maximum form length is 711 0 3 mm 28 0 013 in when used with preprocessing and postprocessing devices Note The InfoPrint 3000 operates in simplex and duplex mode depending on the model selected Model ES1 operates only in simplex mode An Advanced Function Common Control Unit AFCCU controls the printing system and is attached to the second printer engine in the configuration The AFCCU is based on the IBM RISC technology and includes an Extended Graphics Adaptor XGA touch screen monitor that is used as a Display Touch Screen Two preprocessing postprocessing device interfaces one in each print
104. A label causes new developer mix to move from the developer mix inlet into the developer HC60G014 20 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Table 3 Developer Area Controls Using This Control Does This Toner Cartridge Contains toner for the toner hopper 1 Developer Mix Inlet Supply opening for adding developer mix to the developer 2 Developer Drain Starts the developer mix drain process to move developer mix Lever from the developer into an external container for disposal 3 Developer Run Starts the developer mix load process to move developer mix from Pushbutton the developer inlet into the developer also aids in removing used developer mix from the developer 4 Chapter 3 Functional Areas 21 Forms Input and Transfer Station Area You load forms that are ready for processing into the printer at the forms input area The developer mix bottle and drain hose are also in the forms input area In the transfer station area print images are transferred from the photoconductor drum to the forms that are traveling through the printer Printer Control Panel describes the printer control panel in detail HC60G055 Transfer station Developer area Printer control panel Forms input area Static brushes a u FF WO N e Tension arm 22 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Printer Control Panel
105. Ajuo ajqeyieay y sseo0y o OWaY seid und Isnipy 1SOd d1d aunbyuog uonesnByu05 JUSWYSeHY uld sjuawyoeny ainbyuog uonenyuog 4 Uld Uld uesay UMopInyS a6ed OYdN m OudN suo ubl y peaiuL slaying 1eaj gor jaoue9 J9 UNOD S Y s1013 SUOI USAJ9 U soabessay sjuewyoeny snjejsg 193 Ulld isn py uid peo7 0 woy ubissy suondo suon y 8918S z jeuy 1 Uld ainbyuoy dois sw104 3u14 q Apeoy ainbyuog aj e190dO Figure 10 Procedure Access Chart InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide 44 Operate Pull Down Menu Figure 11 shows the selections available on the Operate pull down menu Operate Configure Analyze Options Help Ready Stop Printer Status Cancel Job Clear Buffers Thread Align Forms NPRO NPRO Page Shutdown Restart Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job Figure 11 Operate Pull Down Menu HC60G089 Ready Makes the complete system both printers Ready when it is in duplex mode It also makes the individual printer Ready when it is in simplex or dual simplex mode If pages are waiting to be printed and the system or printer is online to
106. Attach configuration item setting above is No Form Feed Length This entry sets the length in inches that forms are to be Range of 17 to 250 inches Default D moved forward through Printer 1 when the Feed Forms is 60 inches pushbutton is selected during execution of the Thread Align Forms procedure in duplex mode Length of Forms This entry sets the length in inches of the forms path Range of 150 to 800 inches Between Transfer length from the alignment mark on the transfer station Default is 315 inches Points D tractors of Printer 1 through Printer 1 across the floor to the Buffer Flipper Unit through the Buffer Flipper Unit across the floor to Printer 2 under Printer 2 up to the alignment mark on the transfer station tractors of Printer 2 This is used during the duplex mode procedure Thread Align Forms If you are continually feeding paper at either printer in order to get the forms aligned this configuration item may have to be changed for physical layout details and dimensions Chapter 8 Configuring the System 223 Table 16 Printer Configuration Items continued Configuration Item Description Value Options Front Sheet Sequence D This entry sets whether the front side of the forms will be printed on Printer 1 or Printer 2 in duplex mode Front First means that the odd pages 1st 3rd 5th of a customer job will print on Printer 1 and the even pages 2nd 4th 6
107. Description Value Options Printer Mode D This entry allows setting whether the duplex system is to be operated in duplex or simplex dual simplex mode This item applies to Models ED1 ED2 If you change the Printer Mode the Restart procedure automatically executes a Shutdown procedure Duplex or Simplex Auto Start If Yes all current attachment interface status enable disable is saved during a Shutdown procedure and automatically restored at the next power on of the system Simplex and dual simplex printers are also automatically made Ready at the completion of the power on sequence The Thread Align forms procedure must be performed on duplex printers before the system can be made Ready Yes or No PQE boldness for printer 1 This item must not be changed Note If this value is changed accidentally set the value to 85 and inform the CE during the next visit 100 PQE boldness for printer 2 D Printer 1 Counter See entry for printer 1 CE Change Only The Print Usage Count from the mechanical counter at the rear of the printer may be transferred to this counter which will then become a new base count in the running Printer 1 Counter displayed in the Printer Status Display Touch Screen window See entry for printer 1 0 to 2 000 000 000 Printer 2 Counter D CE Change Only The Print Usage Count from the mechanical counter at the rear of the printer may be transferred
108. Display Touch Screen e A print job is queued if you intend to select the Print While Threading Yesoption Operate Configure Options Thread Align Forms Print While Threading Printer 1 Select No or Yes in the Print While No Feed Page Threading Field Analyze Yes Pri rinter 2 Select Start to Start the Thread Align Feed Page Forms are Connected Feed Forms Mark is Start Completed Aligned Help Forms Procedure Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job Threading Without Printing 1 SELECT the No option within the Print While Threading field 2 SELECT the Start pushbutton A2300157 158 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Follow the steps in the 3 SELECT the Feed Forms pushbutton on the Thread Align Forms window a This prints a solid alignment mark after the leading edge on a page in Printer 1 which is designated as an alignment page A one bar or two bar pattern is also printed on the alignment page The bar shows whether Side 1 or Side 2 of the form is being printed on Printer 1 This prints a dashed alignment mark after the leading edge of the page b This feeds a fixed length of forms through Printer 1 The fixed length is based on the Form Feed Length configuration item shown on the Configure Printer window under the Configure pull down menu It is a multiple of the current loaded Form Name page length
109. Display Touch Screen when the printer is operating in duplex printing mode All the messages that appear and some function switches you need to use are on the Display Touch Screen windows Note When a function switch is on the Display Touch Screen window only the printer switch which is called a pushbutton is described in this section When a function switch is available only on the Display Touch Screen windows it is the only function switch called a pushbutton described 2 oma Form am mplex Oneration on page for details of jam recovery when the system printers are in simplex printing mode After some jams occur within the printer engine the printer automatically reprints certain pages as part of its recovery process This occurs only if the printer is configured to allow reprinting You must set the following Configure Printer configuration items to allow automatic reprinting following a forms jam recovery e Jam Recovery Type Must be set to one of the following Use Normal Jam Repositioning Suppress MICR Jam Repositioning and MICR postprocessing printing is not being requested e Direct Attach Must be set to No Automatic reprinting normally requests and reprints the number of pages of data based on the current in effect page length for all of the pages that can fit in the forms path between the transfer station in Printer 1 and the top of the stacker in Printer 2 at the time the jam was detected A
110. ECT the Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen window for the affected printer Even if automatic reprinting is allowed no pages are reprinted for this type of jam 44 if the error recurs frequently Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 133 134 Jam Between Printer 1 and Printer 2 A jam occurring between Printer 1 and Printer 2 normally causes the forms to tear and separate Both Printer 1 and Printer 2 continue to feed forms and print until an error condition is detected and displayed A large supply of forms may be present on the floor at the output of Printer 1 1 SELECT the Check Reset pushbutton on the Intervention Required Display Touch Screen window 2 Do not flush any forms out of either printer 3 Manually pull the forms through the Buffer Flipper Unit under Printer 2 and up into forms input area of Printer 2 Enter the Thread Align Forms Display Touch Screen procedure see on page If necessary SELECT the Printer 1 Feed Fase ei bul on the Thread Align Forms window to feed enough forms to splice the forms from the Buffer Flipper Unit to the forms remaining in the Printer 2 path 5 Complete the Thread Align Forms procedure 6 SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the main Display Touch Screen window Jams Between the Printer and a Postprocessing Device A jam or separated form occurring between the printer and the postprocessing device is not detected and presented as a form jam The usual er
111. ELECT the Printer 1 Feed Page pushbutton on the window on the Printer 1 5 If the queued job is too short to print all pages on Printer 1 for the complete Length of Forms Between Transfer Points the Feed Forms window pushbutton and the Feed pushbutton become inoperable before the Length of Forms Between Transfer Points is achieved A message appears in the non selectable Information field on the window informing you that there is No Data to Print In this case you may either e SELECT the No option in the Print While Threading field This restores use of the Feed Forms pushbutton and the Feed pushbutton so that you may continue with the threading process e Request the host system operator to send more print jobs to the system which when received resumes printing operations on Printer 1 Periodically SELECT the Feed Forms pushbutton When more data is available forward movement of the forms while printing resumes until the Length of Forms Between Printers distance is achieved 6 After enough forms have moved through Printer 1 and the Buffer Flipper Unit and have created a buffer big enough between the Buffer Flipper Unit and Printer 2 to allow you to thread Printer 2 do the following a Remove power from the Urge Unit in the Forms Input area of Printer 2 You cannot thread the Urge Unit while the roller is moving b Thread forms through the Urge Unit c Restore power to the Urge Unit 7 Follow the steps in A
112. IBM marketing representative has information on the voltage requirements in your country SAFEOOES Fire Safety Because the forms and toner used in the printer can burn you should take normal precautions to prevent fire These precautions include common sense measures such as keeping potentially combustible materials for example curtains and chemi cals away from the printer providing adequate ventilation and cooling limiting unattended operation and having trained personnel available and assigned to the printer SAFEOOFS Lightning Safety To avoid personal risk do not install or reconfigure a communication port or a teleport during a lightning storm SAFEOOLS XXii InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide LASER SAFETY The printers comply with the performance standards set by the U S Food and Drug Administration for a Class 1 Laser Product This means that these printers belong to aclass of laser products that does not produce hazardous laser radiation in customer access areas This classification was accomplished by providing the necessary protective housings and scanning safeguards to ensure that laser radiation is inaccessible or within Class 1 limits There are various tool operated machine covers that should be moved removed or replaced only by trained service personnel There are no operator controls or adjustments associated with the laser DANGER lt 23 gt Using controls making adjustments or performing pr
113. If the postprocessing device includes any rollers sensors or any other hardware that would interfere with the operation of the stacker you must remove those interferences before you attempt to use the stacker If the Stacker Enabled configuration item under the Configure Printer procedure is set to Yes and there are no postprocessing devices installed and enabled on the printer the stacker table automatically rises when printing begins To raise the stacker table manually press the stacker table UP key on the stacker control panel If a postprocessing device is installed on a printer and is enabled the stacker table is lowered and is prevented from moving upward The pendulum and other devices in the stacker are also prevented from operating In duplex mode the stacker in Printer 1 is always disabled as if a postprocessing device were installed and enabled Error and Jam Recovery If the Jam Recovery Type configuration item setting under Configure Printer allows it printed pages before the top of the stacker are automatically reprinted following the clearing of a forms jam This applies only to jams that occur within the printer If a jam occurs anywhere past the printer stacker that is in the postprocessing device you can extend the number of pages automatically reprinted by setting the Jam Recovery Point configuration item under the Following a forms jam if a postprocessing device is particularly difficul
114. InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide a DA A SS aT esses m e e e w m a ee w m a M y 544 5564 01 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide a DA A SS aT esses m e e e w m a ee w m a M y 544 5564 01 Note Before using this information and the product it supports be sure to read the general information under Notices onl Second Edition October 1998 The following paragraph does not apply to any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you Changes are made periodically to this publication Requests for IBM publications should be made to your IBM representative or to the IBM branch office serving your locality If you request publications from the address given below your order will be delayed because publications are not stocked there A Reader s Comment Form is provided at the back of this publication If the form has been removed comments can be sent by fax to 1 800 524 1519 by E mail to print_pubs us ibm com or by mail to IBM Printing Systems Company
115. Job Figure 7 Grayed Out Check Reset Pushbutton A2300170 For example when a printer is in the Ready state the Check Reset pushbutton is grayed out but it is not grayed out when a printer is in the Not Ready state Note Except for the figure above none of the selection items pull down menu procedures or pushbuttons that would normally be grayed out on a pull down menu or procedure window are shown that way in any of the window figures in this publication 38 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Control Procedures System Menu The System Menu Symbol 1 is a horizontal line within a pushbutton on the left side of the Title Bar on all procedure windows 2 When you select this symbol a pull down menu 3 appears directly under the symbol Operate Configure Analyze Options Printer Status Switch To Attachments Parallel Channel A Disabled Parallel Channel B Disabled 2 Messages y Printer Error D205 A Print Screen Close Reset e Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job Figure 8 System Menu Symbol Pull Down Menu HC60G087 There are three actions on the pull down menu from which you can choose Switch to Displays a pop up window that lists all of the procedures that are currently open for example see 4 on Fic eon pape ae Selecting any procedure name from the list moves the window for the pro
116. Load Select a Form Name Letter OK Cancel ew Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job If you have changed to a different size form SELECT the Assign Form to Load procedure from the Options pull down menu If the form name in the Select a Form Name box is the form you are loading SELECT the Cancel pushbutton If the form name is not in the Select a Form Name box SELECT the Search pushbutton A keyboard appears so you can enter the name of the form you are loading Description 8 5 x 12 in Form Size 12 000 by 8 500 inchq lt Note The search function is case sensitive That is you must enter the form name exactly including any capital letters as it was originally defined When you have found the correct form name SELECT the OK pushbutton If you have changed to preprinted forms or labels check the forms alignment and the location of the print on the page See If necessary enable the channels SELECT the Ready pushbutton to continue InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide A2300171 Loading Forms Duplex Mode The ED1 ED2 duplex printing system is designed to have forms loaded through Printer 1 the Buffer Flipper Unit and Printer 2 for duplex printing rinting applications age 10 contains inotruclions for loading forms ae an ESI printer or ED1 ED2 printers in dual simplex mode These instructions are for
117. N A N A Points Duplex Mode Only Front Sheet Sequence Duplex Mode Front First Front Second N A N A Only Verification Marks Duplex Mode Yes No N A N A Only Logical Page Increment 0 to 20 pels Clear Memory for Security Yes No Screen Saver Timeout 0 to 60 minutes Alarm Suppression Yes No Fuser Inactivity Timer 0 to 9 hours Eject to Front Facing Yes No Form Definition Order Yes No Stacker Enabled Yes No Cut Sheet Emulation None e Normal Left to Right e Normal Right to Left e Inverted Left to Right e Inverted Right to Left BTS Installed Yes No BTS Enabled Yes No Offsetter Installed Yes No Offsetter Enabled Yes No Offset on Mark Forms Yes No 3130 Bar Code Compatibility Yes No Printer Preheat Temperature 45 to 100 C Scan Factory Adjust for Printer 1 CE Change Only N A N A N A Process Factory Adjust for Printer 1 CE Change Only N A N A N A Scan Factory Adjust for Printer 2 CE Change Only N A N A N A Process Factory Adjust for Printer 2 CE Change Only N A N A N A 252 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Table 24 Configuration Worksheet Duplex Models continued Selected Values Item Available Values Duplex Dual Simplex Printer 1 Printer 2 Beam 1 Offset Adjustment for Printer CE Change Only 0 0 to 15 9 N A N A N A 1 Beam 2 Off
118. On the Shutdown Restart window SELECT the Shutdown pushbutton In dual simplex mode on the Shutdown Restart window SELECT the Shutdown pushbutton for the other printer if desired Wait for a Shutdown Complete message to appear on the Display Touch Screen In dual simplex mode this message appears only if both printers are shutdown 3 Press the AFCCU Power Off if in Local switch for any combination of powered on elements Emergency Power Off In case of an emergency you can set the Unit Emergency to Power Off to remove all power from the frame PUM or AFCCU in which the switch is installed and from the attached printer engine This action on one of the system printers does not effect power on the other printer in the system but causes the other printer to be functionally inoperable Attention Do not use Unit Emergency Power Off switch to switch power off to the system unless you have an emergency Doing so can cause loss of data and hardware problems in the AFCCU 60 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Shutting Down and Restarting the System Use this procedure when e A recovery action procedure instructs you to either Shutdown or Restart the system e You are changing the Configure Printer Printer Mode setting from dual simplex to duplex e You want to do a general shutdown and power off the system You must use the Shutdown procedure to do the following e Close all active procedures e Disable all enabled
119. Power Switch 0 Switches the monitor on and off OSD Select qe Highlight Adjust Activates the On Screen Display and selects a control icon Pops out when pushed Rotates to highlight OSD icons and adjusts setting after an icon has been selected Contrast Q Adjusts contrast between foreground and background Brightness Adjusts background brightness Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 65 On Screen Display Controls In addition to brightness and contrast the On Screen Display OSD controls allow you to make further adjustments to the image on the monitor When you push in the OSD Select button the OSD main menu appears on the screen 1024 x 768 68 7k 85Hz NWTM0988 Figure 18 On Screen Display Main Menu Note If you do not make a selection within 6 seconds the OSD menu disappears In Figure 19 the first row brightness and contrast is selected highlighted To select another row use the Highlight Adjust control to scroll to the one you want and then press the OSD Select button A submenu appears for the row you selected The image control rows are for the following Row Submenu Function 1 Adusts brightness and contrast similar to the buttons onthe bottom of the monitor 2 Adjusts horizontal size and position and vertical size and position of the image 3 Rotates and adjusts the shape of the image 4 Adjusts the color or the color intensity of the image
120. Printer Remote Local Remote Remote 1 For simplex systems When the system master power is from the host system console set the Local Remote switches to Remote When the Local Remote switch is set to Remote do the following 1 Ensure that both printers in a duplex system are connected to a three phase electrical outlet that is reserved for the printers 2 Ensure that the printer in a simplex system is connected to a three phase electrical outlet that is reserved for the printer 3 Inform the host system console operator that the system is ready to be powered on 4 Respond to any error or intervention messages that appear on the Display Touch Screen during the power on sequence At the completion of the power on sequence the Display Touch Screen displays a Printer Status window In duplex mode the Printer Status window is overlaid with a Thread Align Forms procedure window 7 Enable host attachments as required See for details 8 Make the system ready e If you are printing in duplex mode SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the main Display Touch Screen window e If you are printing in simplex or dual simplex mode SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the main Display Touch Screen window for one or both printers 58 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide In Local Controlled Mode For duplex systems When the system master power control is to be controlled locally set the Local Remote switches as shown in Table A f
121. RE 2125 4383 01 Figure 28 Printer Usage Sheet DATE R4C001111 A new Printer Usage Sheet is sent to every customer every month aif 2 3 Open the rear right cover Locate the label Page Counter X 100 Write the numbers on the Printer Usage Sheet exactly as they appear in the printer usage meter Right justify the numbers Do not add leading or trailing zeros Write one number in each box Keep each number inside its box Use large simple shapes Close loops and connect lines Do not use fancy loops or curls Fill in the printer serial number which is on a label below the transfer station at the front of the machine This label also has the printer model number Fill in the machine type and the date Sign the card Mail the completed sheet to IBM Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 147 Running Traces The Traces procedure lets you select start stop and print traces Note e Trace affects both printers when you are printing in duplex mode In simplex mode all trace actions Start Stop Save and Print apply to only to that printer e Tracing may affect performance e The Configure action requires Customer Engineer authorization 1 SELECT the Analyze pull down menu on the main Display Touch Screen window 2 SELECT the Traces procedure The Traces window appears with a list of the available traces and the current status of each Operate Analyze Options
122. SELECT the OK pushbutton SELECT Restart when this prompt appears SELECT the OK pushbutton The Second Simplex window appears You must select the Shutdown Restart procedure from the Operate pull down menu on that Display Touch Screen 172 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide For additional information see and then execute the Shutdown routine A window appears stating that the system is shutting down A second window appears stating that the system is being rebooted At the completion of the reboot the Printer Mode change is in effect the Duplex main Display Touch Screen window appears Note No system power off and power on procedure is required To remove any forms still in the printer see Load paper and on the form for duplex operation see Loading Formd 12 13 Perform the Thread Alien Formd procedure see page d SELECT the Ready pushbutton Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 173 Switching Print Resolution 174 Use this procedure to select the print resolution for a print job when it requires a different print resolution than is currently in use Note Do not change the print resolution in combination with any other 1 2 configuration changes You must do it separately SELECT the Configure pull down menu on the Display Touch Screen window SELECT the Configure Printer procedure The Configure Printer window appears SELECT the Printhead Resolution XXX item where XXX is the current
123. Start the Thread Align Feed Page Forms Procedure Forms are Connected Feed Forms Mark is Aligned Help Start Complies Cancel Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job A2300158 Printing While Threading SELECT the Yes option within the Print While Threading field 2 SELECT the Start pushbutton This informs the control unit to begin the thread align process If no forms were damaged and there is enough slack in the forms splice the forms back together Go to step A If forms must be removed or there is not enough slack to splice the forms back together use the Feed Forms or Printer 1 Feed Page pushbuttons to advance the forms through Printer 1 enough to splice the forms together The first selection of either the Feed Forms or the Printer 1 Feed Page pushbutton does the following a This prints a solid alignment mark after the leading edge on a page in Printer 1 which is designated as an alignment page A one bar or two bar pattern is also printed on the alignment page The bar shows whether Side 1 or Side 2 of the form is being printed on Printer 1 This prints a dashed alignment mark after the leading edge of the page b Feeds a fixed length of forms through Printer 1 either the length set in the Form Feed Length printer configuration item if you select the Feed Forms pushbutton or the length of one page according to the page length definition for th
124. TCP IP Remote software error A462 Token Ring TCP IP Network software error A463 Token Ring TCP IP Unknown software error A464 Token Ring TCP IP Local hardware error A465 Token Ring TCP IP Remote hardware error A466 Token Ring TCP IP Network hardware error A467 Token Ring TCP IP Unknown hardware error A468 Token Ring TCP IP Unknown local error A469 Token Ring TCP IP Unknown remote error A46A Token Ring TCP IP Unknown network error A46B Token Ring TCP IP Unknown error A46C Token Ring TCP IP Invalid configuration during enable A46D Token Ring TCP IP Invalid configuration during run A470 FDDI TCP IP Local software error A471 FDDI TCP IP Remote software error A472 FDDI TCP IP Network software error A473 FDDI TCP IP Unknown software error A474 FDDI TCP IP Local hardware error A475 FDDI TCP IP Remote hardware error A476 FDDI TCP IP Network hardware error A477 FDDI TCP IP Unknown hardware error A478 FDDI TCP IP Unknown local error A479 FDDI TCP IP Unknown remote error A47A FDDI TCP IP Unknown network error A47B FDDI TCP IP Unknown error A47C FDDI TCP IP Invalid configuration during enable A47D FDDI TCP IP Invalid configuration during run A501 Internal printing Invalid event A502 Internal printing File error A503 Internal printing Unexpected ACK A504 Internal printing Host recovery bit set A505 Internal printing Invalid request from ASA AF00 Attachment subsystem cannot open attach driver
125. The area between perforations on continuous printer forms See electronic overlay and preprinted form forms path The entire route that forms travel during processing The forms path usually begins where the forms are loaded and ends at the stacker Synonym for paper path form definition FORMDEF A statement that specifies the attributes of a physical page such as the number of copies and one sided or two sided printing fuse To use heat and pressure to blend toner onto forms to make a permanent bond G GCGID Graphic Character Global Identifier GCSGID Graphic Character Set Global Identifier GDDM Graphical Data Display Manager GOCA Graphics Object Content Architecture graphic A symbol produced by a process such as handwriting drawing or printing See also vector graphics grayed out Indicates that a Display Touch Screen selection is not active and cannot be selected For example the Check Reset pushbutton is grayed out when the printer is in Ready status Graphical Data Display Manager GDDM An IBM licensed program that allows pictures to be defined and displayed through function routines IBM branch office The local IBM sales office IBM Customer Engineer CE An IBM servcie representative who performs maintenance services for IBM hardware IBM Installation Planning Representative An IBM representative who assists customers in planning and meeting the requirements for installing hardware IBM Ma
126. These symbols represent conditions or actions They can help you understand and use the windows shows and explains the symbols that are used on the windows Table 5 Symbols and Visual Cues Visual Cue Explanation The plus sign appears under your finger when you touch the monitor screen surface It moves with your finger if you move your finger across the screen surface The sign is used to point to items to select them by removing your finger from the screen surface A2600023 This is the system menu symbol Every procedure window contains a system menu symbol When you select this symbol a pull down menu appears allowing you to close the window print the screen or switch to other active windows A2600026 Information often appears on the procedure windows in boxed areas called fields This three dimensional outline signifies a selectable field You can select any field with this three dimensional outline A pop up window a keyboard or a keypad window appears when you select a field that you can change A2600027 This two dimensional outline signifies a field that you cannot change You cannot select any field with this two dimensional outline Text in the two dimensional box is for your information only A2600018 This is the scroll bar It appears next to some fields that you can change Use the scroll bar to view additional information that cannot fit in a field You can
127. Timeout This entry allows setting of whether residual print data is to be cleared from memory Clearing memory can result in a delay of up to two minutes before a print job starts Select Yes if a high level of security is required This entry allows specifying in minutes the idle time before the Display Touch Screen monitor screen is blanked out This extends the life of the monitor screen A value of 0 means the screen saver is not used In dual simplex mode if Printer 1 and Printer 2 are set with different values the shortest setting time is used even if the associated printer console is not being used Touching a blank screen caused by this timeout restores the display Yes or No 0 to 60 minutes Default is 10 minutes Alarm Suppression This entry allows suppression of the Operator Alert alarm tone for error and supply item actions Yes or No 224 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Table 16 Printer Configuration Items continued Configuration Item Description Value Options Fuser Inactivity This entry sets the time in hours of printer inactivity 0 to 9 hours Default is 1 hour Timer before the fuser is turned off This saves electrical power costs and extends the life of the printer The fuser automatically turns on when printing resumes with a delay until the fuser has reached operating temperature A value of 0 means that the timer is not used Eject to Front Facing This entry
128. Trimmer Stacker postprocessing device is installed It does not show whether it is being used Yes or No BTS Enabled This entry allows setting whether an installed Burster Trimmer Stacker postprocessing device is being used The host system will not send eject to front facing commands if the BTS is enabled Yes or No Offsetter Installed This entry allows setting whether an Offsetter postprocessing device is installed It does not show whether it is being used Yes or No Offsetter Enabled This entry allows setting whether an installed Offsetter postprocessing device is being used The host system will send Alternate Offset Stacker commands if the offsetter is enabled and the print job contains these commands Yes or No Offset on Mark Forms This entry allows setting whether Alternate Offset Stacker commands from the host system are passed on to an enabled stacking type postprocessing device for any page containing the Mark Forms Yes or No 3130 Bar Code Compatibility This entry defines whether bar codes are printed in the standard format or in the format printed by a 3130 printer Yes or No 226 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Table 16 Printer Configuration Items continued Configuration Item Description Value Options Preheat Platen Temperature This entry allows setting the preheat platen temperature to a higher or lower temperature than the def
129. Unit Local Remote switch is set to Local Powers on the printer when the Printer Local Remote switch is set to Local Control Unit Power Off If In Local Switch Powers off the AFCCU when the Control Unit Local Remote switch is set to Local Printer Power Off If In Local Switch Powers off the printer when the Printer Local Remote switch is set to Local Emergency Power Off Switch On Printer 1 When set to Power Enable the PUM and printer engine can be powered on by Local or Remote control Power Off does an emergency shutdown On simplex printers and Printer 2 of a duplex configuration When set to Power Enable the AFCCU and printer engine can be powered on by Local or Remote control Power Off does an emergency shutdown All power is removed from the system m Attention Using the Unit Emergency Power Off switch can cause loss of data and hardware problems therefore you should use it only in an emergency Chapter 3 Functional Areas 19 Developer Area You add toner and developer mix to the printer in the developer area able 3 onl describes the controls You add toner by placing a new toner cartridge 1 in the developer area next to the Printer Control Panel You add developer mix through the developer mix inlet 2 The developer drain lever 3 which is marked with a B label opens and closes the developer drain The developer run pushbutton 4 which is marked with an
130. a dashed alignment mark after the leading edge of the page b This feeds a fixed length of forms through Printer 1 The fixed length is based on the Form Feed Length configuration item that is shown on the Configure Printer window under the Configure pull down menu It is a multiple of the current loaded Form Name page length that is closest to the Form Feed Length without exceeding it c Pages for the queued job are printed on Printer 1 starting on the page following the alignment page during this and following selections of the Feed Forms pushbutton Printer 2 processes blank pages 4 Continue SELECTING the Feed Forms pushbutton on the window for Printer 1 until the forms do not advance any further Enough forms should have moved through Printer 1 to do the following a Manually thread the Buffer Flipper Unit see Linit on page 162 for details b Advance the forms under Printer 2 into the input area of Printer 2 c Thread Printer 2 The Feed Forms pushbutton for Printer 1 becomes inoperable when a multiple of the current loaded Form Name page length that is closest to but not exceeding the length in the Length of Forms Between Transfer Points configuration item shown on the Configure Printer window under the Configure pull down menu has moved through Printer 1 When the Feed Forms pushbutton and the Feed pushbutton are inoperable and you need additional length to supply enough forms to thread Printer 2 S
131. a job that requires a certain folding pattern are printed correctly A good example is a print job that is to be folded like a book where the cover and all odd numbered pages are to be printed on front facing pages 0 0000000000 00000000000 00000000000 00000000000 000006 ooooooooooojooooooooooojooooooo0o0o000 oooo0o0000000 Page 1 front facing Page 2 back facing Page 3 R4C00076 Page 3 is Face Up Page 4 is Face Down The printers do not count pages However after you inform the printer what the orientation front facing or back facing of the first page of a job will be the printer simply switches a pointer back and forth in its memory to remember the page orientation Therefore the printer is able to determine at the end of a job that the job contained an even or odd number of pages Next Page is Front Facing is the power on default condition If you do not use the Front Face procedure all print jobs are started or restarted using that default which may not be aligned with the fold direction The determination of whether to insert a blank page is still made even if the fold direction is incorrect Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 81 Notes to the Operator 1 To use the eject to front facing page facility you must set the printer configuration item Eject to Front Facing to Yes use the Configure Printer procedure on the Configure pull
132. act your service representative See for instructions Chapter 7 Ordering and Replacing Supplies 203 Changing the Oiler Belt Attention You may leave printer power on while you perform this task but the printer should not be printing R4CO0006 Do this task when you see the following message CHANGE OILER BELT 0793 Note You do not have to replace the oiler belt the first time you see the CHANGE OILER BELT message To bypass the message SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the main Display Touch Screen The message reappears each time end of forms is reached or every 4 000 feet of forms thereafter When 10 000 additional feet of forms have been processed since the message originally appeared you must change the oiler belt before you can return the printer to Ready status You need the following items when you change the oiler belt e New oiler belt e Paper towels 204 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide HC60G052 CAUTION lt 70 gt The oiler belt oiler wick roll and their environments are high temperature areas Be very careful when working in these areas CAUT0100 1 Open the stacker end cover Note When the oiler belt gate is opened the fuser begins to cool down immediately and the message changes to OILER GATE OPEN 2 Turn the wing nut counterclockwise to release the oiler belt gate 3 Place several layers of absorbent material such as
133. actor covers Press the Forms Feed Forward pushbutton to clear the forms from the fuser area Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 139 Fuser and Stacker Areas HC60G050 Open the top and front left cover and the stacker gate Break the forms at a perforation near the pendulum Unload forms from the stacker See pe Go Ns Close the stacker gate 140 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide HC60G063 5 Press and hold the puller lever down 6 Grasping the forms near the fuser entry area pull them up and out of the fuser This moves the forms in the opposite direction from their usual path 7 If the forms will not pull up or if some forms remain in the pendulum do the following a papo Lower the stacker table Open the stacker gate Grasp both sides of the forms and pull down evenly Close the stacker gate Raise the stacker table Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 141 HC60G050 CAUTION lt 60 gt High temperature Let parts cool at least 30 minutes in this area before handing IN CAUTION lt 70 gt The oiler belt oiler wick roll and their environments are high temperature areas Be very careful wh
134. actured from new parts or new and serviceable used parts which perform like new parts In some cases the Machine may not be new and may have been previously installed Regardless of the Machine s production status IBM s warranty terms apply The IBM Warranty IBM warrants that each Machine 1 is free from defects in materials and workmanship and 2 conforms to IBM s Official Published Specifications IBM calculates the expiration of the warranty period from the Machine s Date of Installation The date on your receipt is the Date of Installation unless IBM or your reseller informs you otherwise During the warranty period IBM or your reseller will provide warranty service under the type of service designated for the Machine and will manage and install engineering changes that apply to the Machine IBM or your reseller will specify the type of service For a feature conversion or upgrade IBM or your reseller may require that the Machine on which it is installed be 1 the designated serial numbered Machine and 2 at an engineering change level compatible with the feature conversion or upgrade Some of these transactions called Net Priced transactions may include additional parts and associated replacement parts that are provided on an exchange basis All removed parts become the property of IBM and must be returned to IBM Replacement parts assume the remaining warranty of the parts they replace If a Machine does no
135. address must be different from other addresses on the LAN This is the type of Ethernet cable connector used in the back of the printer This address cannot be changed X 0 to X FFFFFFFFFFFF 10Base2 or 10Base5 238 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide FDDI TCP IP Attachment Information lists all configuration items what each item is used for and the allowable value options for each item The factory set default values are underlined Table 21 FDDI TCP IP Attachment Items Configuration Item Description Value Options FDDI TCP IP Specifies if the FDDI adapter is installed Yes or No Installed TCP Port Specifies the TCP socket address of the attachment 5001 to 65536 Notes 1 Only one address is required for operating a simplex system 2 If your installation runs in dual simplex and duplex mode specify the same TCP Port value for duplex mode as you do for Printer 1 in dual simplex mode IBM recommends using the default value of 5001 Also make sure you specify a unique value for Printer 2 in simplex mode Printer 1 and Printer 2 cannot use the same value If you use the default value of 5001 for Printer 1 IBM recommends using 5002 as the value for Printer 2 3 The TCP Port numbers specified in the printer configuration must match the PORT numbers assigned in the host PSF system 4 Because Printer 1 in a dual simplex system and the complete system in duplex system share a common port nu
136. adio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits IBM is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation xviii InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Canadian Department of Communications compliance statement This Class A digital apparatus meets the requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Avis de conformit aux normes du minist re des Communications du Canada Cet appareil num rique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada The United Kingdom Telecommunications Statement of Complian
137. al simplex modes on Models ED1 ED2 Note Do not change the print mode in combination with any other configuration changes You must do it separately Make other configuration changes after the printer is in the correct print mode Switching from Duplex to Dual Simplex Mode 1 ONO or gt 10 11 To stop the printer SELECT the Stop pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen SELECT the Configure pull down menu on the main Display Touch Screen window SELECT the Configure Printer procedure The Configure Printer window appears Find and SELECT the Printer Mode item SELECT the Simplex item SELECT the OK pushbutton SELECT Restart when this prompt appears A window appears that informs you that an automatic Shutdown procedure has started This is followed by a window that states that the system is being rebooted reloading AFCCU microcode At the completion of the microcode reload the Printer Mode change is in effect one of the main simplex printer Display Touch Screen windows appears Note No system power off and power on procedure is required Switching from Dual Simplex to Duplex Mode 1 o ON ow To stop the printer SELECT the Stop pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen SELECT the Configure pull down menu on the Display Touch Screen window SELECT the Configure Printer procedure The Configure Printer window appears Find and SELECT the Printer Mode item SELECT the Duplex item
138. alled and enabled which disables the stacker mechanism Recovery Actions ili 2 3 10 11 12 Visually check to see if a forms jam is actually present Open the stacker gate If you do not find a jam clean the stacker jam sensors See step ba page ad under Cleaning the Printed Go to step B If you find a jam clear forms from the PEET Note When you remove the forms from the stacker leave 4 to 5 pages attached to the end of the job running in the stacker to ensure correct forms folding when printing resumes Close the stacker gate If either Printer Error stacker jam message is still displayed SELECT the Check Reset pushbutton on the Printer Error Display Touch Screen window Check for and resolve or postpone any other error or intervention message appearing on the Display Touch Screen window Ensure that the Forms Set indicator on the printer control panel displays the same fold direction as the first fold below the perforations on the forms guide SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen window for the affected printer If reprinting is allowed all unfused pages between the transfer station and the top of the stacker plus any jam recovery point distance defined in the printer configuration are reprinted Check for and discard duplicate pages If reprinting is not allowed work with the host system console operator to recover the lost pages gg 44 if the error recurs
139. an operational viewpoint to assign duplex a separate address so the duplex and simplex printers look like unique devices to the operating system The general convention in this case is to assign the duplex system the next consecutive address even after the address for simplex Printer 2 For example if you define Printer 1 in dual simplex as X 30 you should then define Printer 2 in dual simplex as X 31 and optionally define the complete system in duplex as X 32 3 The device addresses specified above must match the device addresses defined to the host PSF software and in the case of S 390 hosts the I O device definitions 00 to FF Hexadecimal notation Default is X 00 Second Channel Specifies the switching mode of the Two Channel Switch Static or Dynamic Mode When a second Parallel Channel is installed a Two Channel Switch facility is provided e Static You can enable only one channel at a time You can connect two interfaces to two channels on the same processing unit on tightly coupled processing units units controlled by the same operating system or on independent uncoupled processing units e Dynamic You can enable both channels at the same time with the two Channel Switch used as a dynamic interface switch Connect the two interfaces to two channels either on the same processing unit or on tightly coupled processing units units controlled by the same operating system You cannot select t
140. and Replacing Supplies 189 Ah lt S S HC60G007 8 Place the new toner collector bag in the toner collector case 9 Return the toner collector case to the printer Note Be sure to insert the toner collector case firmly enough to depress the spring loaded sensor tab in the rear of the cavity 10 Attach the ring to the hook and push down the latch on the toner collector case 11 Close the rear center cover 12 Press Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen to continue 190 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Changing the Developer Mix m Attention You must leave printer power on while you do this task but the printer should not be printing Using the wrong developer mix can cause serious print quality problems this can force a service call See for the correct developer mix part number Do this task when you see the following message crnce DEVELOPER MIX 0788 3 Note You do not have to replace developer mix the first time you see the CHANGE DEVELOPER MIX message To bypass the message SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the main Display Touch Screen The CHANGE DEVELOPER MIX message reappears each time end of forms is reached or every 4 000 feet of forms thereafter When 50 000 additional feet of forms have been processed since the message originally appeared you must change developer mix before you can retur
141. at allow the hook up of an alert signal of your choice The post accepts the following e Standard dual or single banana plugs e Leads that are terminated with spade lugs e Stripped bare wire leads The recommended voltage for the posts is 12 V dc at a maximum current of 5 amps Note There is an internal 5 amp fuse Voltage is not present at the binding post You are responsible for supplying power to run any external device The two contacts of the binding post are connected together with the closing of a relay contact The relay turns on only when the operator alert lamp is operating during an error condition To reset or turn off the relay press the Check Reset switch on the Display Touch Screen window for the affected printer Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities Loading Forms Simplex or Dual Simplex Mode Do this task when any of the following situations occur e When you see the END OF FORMS 078A message e You need to change forms e When you are prompted by a forms jam recovery procedure step This section provides step by step instructions for loading forms in a Model ES1 rinter or Models ED1 ED2 in dual simplex mode Mode on page 114 contains instructions for loading form in an ED1 ED2 printing system in duplex mode These instructions are for loading boxed continuous forms that are loaded at the forms input area If preprocessing or postprocessing devices or both are used with the printing sys
142. at the same window Simplex Mode e Once you have ensured that the preceding conditions have been met under the Operate pull down menu SELECT the Stop pushbutton then SELECT the NPRO pushbutton on the main Display Touch Screen window of the printer e Forms starting with the page at the transfer station move through the printer to the stacker area The distance they move is the fixed NPRO length plus an additional length if either the NPRO Length or the Pre postprocessor Extended NPRO values are set to a non zero value Duplex Mode e Once you have ensured that the preceding conditions have been met under the Operate pull down menu SELECT the Stop push button then SELECT the NPRO pushbutton on the main Display Touch Screen window of the target printer e Forms starting with the page at the transfer station of Printer 1 move through both printers to the stacker area of Printer 2 The distance they move is the fixed NPRO length plus an additional length if either the NPRO Length or the Pre postprocessor Extended NPRO values are set to a non zero value NPRO Page Procedure NPRO Page is a single page advance function NPRO Page moves the forms forward to the next top of form position one page at a time In duplex mode NPRO Page moves forms forward through the forms path of Printer 1 one page at a time the Buffer Flipper Unit and Printer 2 toward the stacker area to the next top of form position A page t
143. ault as needed for different types of forms If 0 zero is entered for the preheat platen temperature under Define Forms the temperature set under Configure Printer is used For Models ED1 ED2 a temperature must be set for Printer 1 and Printer 2 Range of 45 to 100 C in increments of 5 Default is 80 C Scan Factory Adjust for Printer 1 CE Change Only This is used by service personnel to adjust the scan direction printing registration Range of 0 to 100 units Default is 40 units Unit 2 pels Process Factory Adjust for Printer 1 CE Change Only This is used by service personnel to adjust the process direction printing registration Range of 0 to 60 units Default is 15 units Unit 1 pel Scan Factory Adjust for Printer 2 D Process Factory Adjust for Printer 2 D CE Change Only This is used by service personnel to adjust the scan direction printing registration CE Change Only This is used by service personnel to adjust the process direction printing registration Range of 0 to 100 units Default is 40 units Unit 2 pels Range of 0 to 60 units Default is 15 units Unit 1 pel Beam 1 offset adjustment CE Change Only This is used by maintenance personnel to control the vertical alignment or horizontal adjustment of the separate beams of a multi beam printer Range of 0 0 to 15 9 Default is 8 0 units Unit 1 pel Beam 2 offset adjustment
144. available to print test pages during this procedure You cannot complete this procedure without queued print data available In printing the term registration refers to the relative print positions of images that are printed at different times For example when you process preprinted forms the registration is good if the new image printed by the system printer aligns correctly with the preprinted image as shown in Figure 1 Kuhlly Conditioning Name Quantity Item Smithson R T 714562 05 29 90 Barckley Wm 518329 06 02 90 Martins S J 487641 06 03 90 Balons G E 894265 06 03 90 A 1 Towing 462894 06 03 90 Jones S W 783466 06 04 90 Kelly J M 186435 06 06 90 Fischer G M 087462 06 07 90 Adams T A 812576 06 07 90 Mark IV Prop 428967 06 08 90 Hill W A 932465 06 11 90 Cullen E T 943251 06 26 90 Hertler D E 147563 06 27 90 R4C00037 Figure 19 Good Registration Print that extends beyond box edges and text that overlaps other text are examples of poor registration as shown in Figure 20 68 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Kuhlly Conditioning Quantity Item 714562 05 29 90 418329 06 02 90 487641 06 03 90 894265 06 03 90 462894 06 03 90 7483466 06 04 90 186435 06 06 90 6 07 90 087462 Figure 20 Poor Registration Note on Point of Origin R4C00038
145. ay Touch Screen Chapter 7 Ordering and Replacing Supplies 215 216 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Chapter 8 Configuring the System Changing the Language of Messages 218 Configuring Preprocessing Postprocessing Configuring the Printer Si ke se a 219 Devices Interfaces F 241 Printer Configuration Information Sse oe a 220 Pre Postprocessor Configuration Values 243 Configuring the Host Attachments 229 Configuring Remote Access 245 Parallel Channel Configuration information 232 Defining Forms 247 ESCON Channel Configuration Information 234 Duplex Configuration Worksheet 251 Token Ring TCP IP Attachment Information 235 Simplex Configuration Worksheet 258 Ethernet TCP IP Attachment Information 237 Form Identification Worksheets 263 FDDI TCP IP Attachment Information 239 Form Identification Worksheet 264 Important This chapter describes how to update the printer configuration It assumes that the person changing the configuration is familiar with the various settings and understands the impact that changes may have on the system Copyright IBM Corp 1998 217 Changing the Language of Messages This procedure lets you change the language that is used for all text within the Display Touch Screen windows 1 SELECT the Options pull down menu on the main Display Touch Screen window 2 SELECT the Change Language procedure You see the Change Language window which lists the
146. b SELECT the value you want from the pop up window or enter data on the keypad window Then SELECT the OK pushbutton Repeat this step for as many items as you want to change Note If you are changing Printer Mode or Printhead Resolution any other configuration items you may be changing will change only for the mode you are switching from The mode you are switching to will not have any changed configuration items c When you have made all the changes SELECT the OK pushbutton You see the Restart prompting window d If you have other configuration changes to make you can make them before you restart the system If your configuration changes are complete SELECT the Restart pushbutton on the Restart window to make them effective Printer Configuration Information describes all configuration items what each is used for and the allowable value options for each item The factory set default value options are underlined or separately specified Important able 16 on page 221 lists all configuration items for all models of the printers Some items may be greyed out or not shown for your particular model of printer e Configuration items that are marked D appear only for Duplex systems e Configuration items that are marked S appear only for Simplex systems e All unmarked items appear for both Duplex and Simplex systems 220 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Table 16 Printer Configuration Items Configuration Item
147. belt motor overcurrent 017B Left finger belt motor overcurrent 0211 Charge corona voltage error 0212 Transfer corona voltage error 0213 Preclean corona voltage error 0221 Mirror operating error 0222 Video data active 0223 Mirror motor drive off 0224 Mirror motor start up error 0225 Resolution lens initial position error 0226 Resolution lens motor overcurrent 022A PC drum cover is open laser interlock 0231 Mag brush bias error 0232 Conveyor roll rotation error 0233 Mag roll motor thermal 0234 Toner overfeed error 0235 Toner underfeed error 0236 Toner feed motor overcurrent 0241 Primary erase lamp never on 0243 Primary erase lamp always on 0251 Cleaning brush rotation error 0252 Cleaner brush motor thermal 0253 Cleaner housing position error 0254 Cleaning housing motor driver 0264 Cyclone blower motor thermal 0266 Cyclone blower rotation error 0281 Preheat A B overtemperature 0282 Preheat A B undertemperature 0284 Preheat C D undertemperature 0286 Preheat element A lost temperature 0287 Preheat element B lost temperature 0288 Preheat element C lost temperature 282 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Table 30 SRC Messages continued Code Message Text Type Printer Error unless noted otherwise 028A Thermistor 1 over temperature 028B Thermistor 2 over tempterature 028C Thermistor 3 over te
148. ber of pages is the physically configured distance from the top of the stacker to or through the postprocessing device Figure 25 shows the normal reprint path length from the transfer station 1 to the stacker 3 It also shows the additional Jam Recovery Point Distance from the stacker 3 to or through the postprocessing device 5 O ON wo k HC60G002 Figure 25 Reprint Path Length Following the automatic reprinting of pages you must check for and discard any duplicate pages that may have been printed Locate the first reprinted page and Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 121 attempt to find that same page in the stacker or a postprocessing device If you find it discard all pages starting with that page In all cases but one the automatic reprinting of pages recovers all pages that might have been lost or damaged as the result of the jam The exception occurs when a FUSER WRAP 0134 jam type is detected A jam of this type can backup accordion pleat the forms until the error is detected and the forward movement of the forms stopped If this occurs a few lost pages are not automatically reprinted You need to work with the host system console operator to take action to recover those lost pages If the printer is not configured to recover lost pages you may need to ask the host system console operator to do one of the following e Restart
149. ble 15 IBM Supplies Worksheet Approximate Forms IBM Supply Item Processed In Feet Part Number Minimum Order Quantity Quantity Needed Toner cartridge 30 000 to 72 000 per 1402828 1 carton 6 toner cartridge cartridges and 3 toner collector bags per carton Developer Mix 850 000 per bottle 1402829 1 carton 2 bottles per carton Fuser Oil 1 kilogram 800 000 per bottle 1372463 1 carton 1 bottle per 2 2 lb bottle carton Oiler Belt 1 200 000 per belt 1402827 1 carton 1 belt per carton Oil Pan Absorbent Pad Contact Service Representative See note above 1 pad 1 pad per pack Fine Filter 1 200 000 per filter 1402826 1 carton 1 filter per carton Splicing Tape 45 feet of tape per 4165880 roll 1 carton 72 rolls per carton 1 Yield depends on the contrast setting print coverage form type and environment Ordering Supplies You can order supplies directly from IBM or from your Lexmark representative Your IBM representative can assist you in the procedure for placing your first order of supplies Maintenance Supply Items In the U S A Latin America and EMEA the IBM Monthly Maintenance Charge includes the fuser oil oiler belt and fine filter Approximately a 90 day stock of these items are supplied with each printer In the U S A you can order these maintenance items by calling 1 800 793 5888 if you have an IBM Maintenance Cont
150. ble Values Selected Value Type e Coupled Preprocessor e Coupled Postprocessor e Advanced Postprocessor MICR e Advanced Postprocessor SMM Select Medium Modification Characteristics Pre Postprocessor Extended NPRO 0 to 800 inches Pre Postprocessor Busy Timer 1 to 999 seconds Postprocessor Tag Type Coupled e RSI Compatible Distance to Postprocessor e 24 to 800 inches e 24 to 1200 inches Postprocessor Error Page Stop 0 to 50 pages Postprocessor Verify Alignment Page Stop 0 to 5000 pages Pre Postprocessor Baud Rate in Kbps 19 2 or 62 5 DEVICE Number Port Number 1 2 3 Enabled Yes No Name 1 to 12 alphanumeric characters including spaces Type Coupled Preprocessor e Coupled Postprocessor e Advanced Postprocessor MICR e Advanced Postprocessor SMM Select Medium Modification Characteristics Pre Postprocessor Extended NPRO 0 to 800 inches Pre Postprocessor Busy Timer 1 to 999 seconds Postprocessor Tag Type e Coupled e RSI Compatible e Advanced Distance to Postprocessor 24 to 800 inches 24 to 1200 inches Postprocessor Error Page Stop 0 to 50 pages Postprocessor Verify Alignment Page Stop 0 to 5000 pages Pre Postprocessor Baud Rate in Kbps 19 2 or 62 5 DEVICE Number Port Number 172 3 Enabled Yes No Chapter 8 Configuring the System 261 Table 2
151. box e A keypad or keyboard window in which you can enter a new value Chapter 4 Using the Display Touch Screen 37 The new value you select or enter appears in the selectable field on the procedure window Radio Buttons A radio button on the Display Touch Screen consists of a diamond and some associated text Radio buttons allow you to choose between two or more responses or actions The diamond is highlighted for the active choice You are allowed only one choice within any set of radio buttons Scroll Bar Some procedure windows and pop up windows contain a selection list box that has multiple selections Many selection list boxes have a vertical scroll bar on the right side of the box This bar allows you to view additional unseen information in the box Inactive Items All pushbutton text selection list items and pull down menu procedures appear regardless of whether they are currently selectable Not all items are available on all printer models Items that you cannot select are grayed out which means the text is faint but readable Operate Configure Analyze Printer Status Status Attachments TCP IP Token Ring driver Disabled Ready 7 Messages Resolution 240 240 No attachments enabled Reset Counter 0 feet Print Counter 0 feet Reset Counter Options gt k ce lt Help Stop Check Reset NPRO Cancel
152. brush inside the corona housing cleans the corona b Gently push the corona back into place Ensure that you have pushed the corona in completely 25 Clean the brushes below the transfer station 26 Gently lower the transfer station toward the e drum and latch it using the Transfer Station Control Lever See ed e Canad a aee io details 27 Close the top left and front center left covers of the printer 96 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide STACKER AREA HC60G067 28 Open the stacker gate 5 if the buffer flipper unit or an installed postprocessing device does not interfere 29 Use a toner certified vacuum cleaner to clean paper dust chads and other debris from the following e Pendulum 1 e Stacker table 2 e Stacker floor 3 e Finger belts 4 If you cannot open the stacker gate completely because of interference from the buffer flipper unit or an installed postprocessing device open the gate as wide as you can Clean as much of the area as you can reach Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 97 Sensor R4C00188 Sensor S Mirror 7 Sensor R4C00237 31 Close the stacker gate 98 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide FUSER AREA 32 Open the front left cover 33 Use a soft cloth or paper towel to wipe up excess fuser oil on any surfaces 34 Use a vacuum cleaner to remove chads paper or debr
153. but the printer should be disabled CAUTION lt 70 gt The oiler belt oiler wick roll and their environments are high temperature areas Be very careful when working in these areas CAUT0100 1 SELECT the Stop pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen window for the affected printer 2 Open the stacker end cover HC60G052 86 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide 3 ONouasr 10 11 12 13 To release the oiler belt gate turn the wing nut counterclockwise ube a e K HC60G051 Open the oiler belt gate Allow the oiler belt to cool for at least 10 minutes Lower the hot roll shield Spread papers on the floor or place a wastebasket under the oiler belt Use a piece of lightweight cardboard to scrape paper dust and paper chads from the oiler belt Raise the hot roll shield Close the oiler belt gate Turn the wing nut clockwise to latch the gate Ensure that the gate is firmly latched Close the stacker end cover The fuser begins a warm up cycle To make the printer ready SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen window Printing resumes when the fuser completes its warm up cycle Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 87 Cleaning the Printer Clean the following areas of both printers once each day Developer area Forms input area Transfer station area Stacker area Rear service area Clean the foll
154. ce This apparatus is approved under the approval No NS G 1234 J 100003 for the indirect connections to the public telecommunications systems in the United Kingdom Statement for CISPR 22 Edition 2 Compliance Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures German Conformity Statement Dieses Ger t erf llt die Bedingungen der EN 55022 Klasse A F r diese Klasse von Ger ten gilt folgende Bestimmung nach dem EMVG Ger te d rfen an Orten fiir die sie nicht ausreichend entst6rt sind nur mit besonderer Genehmigung des Bundesminesters fiir Post und Telekommunikation oder des Bundesamtes f r Post und Telekommunikation betrieben werden Die Genehmigung wird erteilt wenn keine elektromagnetischen St rungen zu erwarten sind Auszug aus dem EMVG vom 9 Nov 92 Para 3 Abs 4 European Community EC Conformity Statement This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council Directive 89 336 EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility IBM cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non recommended modification of the product including the fitting of non IBM option cards Shielded Cables European Statement Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to r
155. ce call Do not reuse waste toner or developer mix e The yields listed in able 15 on page 177 are approximations They are not a warranty or guarantee of minimum life they are provided only to assist in supplies planning Analyze your actual usage figures to determine how much of each supply item to stock e Toner yield is affected by several factors including print coverage contrast setting form type and environment e The Fine Filter processing yield is based on 4 square inches of toner coverage per foot of forms with the printer control panel Contrast switch in the center 4 position More dense applications such as extensive bar codes images solid area fill or printing with a higher Contrast setting can expect to achieve yields lower than those achieved with the average text page e Your CE may install an oil pan and an absorbent pad in the pan if it is necessary for optimum printer operation The Oil Pan Absorbent Pad life span varies according to the way you run the printer In general the more often the printer is idle the more often you may need to replace the pad IBM recommends that you check the absorbent pad weekly The InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide contains instructions for checking the pad 176 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Contact your CE for replacement pads s is a work sheet that lists IBM supplies and their part numbers Make copies of this work sheet to use when you order supplies Ta
156. ce the contrast by pressing the Lighter Contrast Control key on the printer control panel e Print a stack of forms and check to ensure that the problem is resolved The Display Touch Screen Printer Status window shows READY but the printer does not respond when the host system console operator directs a job to it There is probably a problem with the attachment hardware connecting the printer to the controlling computer system such as the channel is not enabled or cables are not connected Work with the system console operator and the system programmer to resolve the problem Review the questions in 2 age 268 to see if there have been any changes in the environment that might affect attachment hardware The printer starts and stops repeatedly or the forms move at an irregular speed This problem may be related to the application that is being processed or to the printer configuration If the printed pages are complex to format if many transmission errors occur or if the buffered data commands are issued by the host the printers must pause while those pages are created in memory Work with the system engineer or system programmer to resolve the problem The Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers G544 3921 contains detailed information about selecting forms and designing applications and may be of use in resolving the problem The Display Touch Screen shows END OF
157. ce with the printers begin with the following chapters Copyright IBM Corp 1998 XXV a on page 9 which describes the operator s role in using and maintaining the printers 1 which describes the parts of the pater including its noice contol and Display Touch Screens available Fom the pull Pem menus All Operators If you are experienced with the printers you probably will not need to refer to this guide for routine procedures However this guide may be helpful when you are handling unusual tasks or problems The following chapters are organized for easy reference Terminology For definitions of terms used in this publication as well as other publications in the printer library see the Pea on page 29d Notation Conventions The following notation conventions are used throughout this publication e Words that appear in messages on a Display Touch Screen window are shown in COMPUTER print For example CHANGE DEVELOPER MIX The words SELECT and SELECTING all capital bold print refer to the act of touching the touch sensitive Display Touch Screen as though you were pressing a switch choosing an option or entering data Words that identify switches indicators levers and Display Touch Screen window names that you will use are shown in bold print For example Press the Ready switch SELECT the Configure Printer procedure window on the Display Touch Screen New terms are italicized where
158. cedure to the front Print Screen Prints the screen if all installed host attachments are disabled Close Closes the procedure the same as if you had selected the Close on the procedure window Multiple Procedures You can have any number of procedures active at one time However only five procedures can appear on the Display Touch Screen at one time To switch back and forth between the procedures on the Display Touch Screen select the title bar of the procedure you want If there are more than five procedures that are active you can still use the procedures that have been pushed off the display Do this by selecting the Switch to option from the System Menu pull down menu In duplex or simplex mode multiple copies of the same procedure cannot run at the same time Once a procedure is started the menu bar item that started the Chapter 4 Using the Display Touch Screen 39 40 procedure will not start another procedure of the same type The window will display the procedure window at the front of the cascade However in dual simplex mode the same procedure can be open and active on both Printer 1 and Printer 2 Display Touch Screen windows Figure d shows The Main Window Four of the five maximum procedure windows The System Menu pull down menu The Switch to pop up window which lists all open procedures a A Ww N me A symbol that indicates that more than five procedures are open Use the scroll bar to the right of
159. ch as electrical and space that must be considered before installing the IBM InfoPrint 3000 library A collection of related files For example one line of an invoice may form an item a complete invoice may form a file and the collection of inventory control files may form a library The libraries used by an organization are known as the data bank licensed program A separately priced program that bears an IBM copyright and is offered to customers under the terms and conditions of the Agreement for IBM Licensed Programs line printer A printer that prints a line of characters as a unit Contrast with page printer logical page The print on the page such as composed text graphics and fonts within defined margins logo An identifying emblem statement or motto of a company MB Megabyte 1MB 1 048 576 bytes MICR Magnetic ink character recognition microcode In the InfoPrint 3000 refers to the microprogramming stored on the microcode or EC diskette Microcode is used by the control unit to manage the printer and its functions microperforation Extremely small perforations After forms are separated those with microperforations typically have smoother edges than those with regular perforations MIH Missing interruption handler MMR Modified Modified READ 2 dimensional image compression algorithm Also referred to as CCITT Group 4 MR Modified READ READ Relative Element Address Designate 2 dimens
160. ch or 3 inch length Ensure that the tractor holes are aligned correctly on the tractor pins Ensure that the forms are positioned correctly in the forms input area The forms must not twist or tear when they travel around the forms guide and through the transfer station If the forms are in a box ensure that the box does not interfere with form movement If you are using fan fold forms and the stack of forms seems to curve dishing roll the first form in the opposite direction of the curve Then unroll it before you put the form on the transfer station lower tractors Load different forms or if you are using fan fold forms a new box of the same forms Ensure that the forms are loaded correctly If the jam occurs only with one kind of form especially one that has not been used before on the printers the problem may be form related Forms that are unusually heavy or light forms that have holes or cuts and adhesive label forms are all likely to cause jams Forms orientation may have an effect on stacking and jam frequency On non preprinted forms If you are using fan fold forms rotating the box 180 can change the frequency of jams Remove damaged sections If you are using fan fold forms and you folded back the first page of the form try loading the form without folding Conversely if you did not fold the form try doing so 144 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide If you have been running labels print a te
161. chitecture special purpose materials Printable items other than blank forms for example adhesive labels and preprinted forms stack lean A measurable slope from the vertical of a stack of forms Excessive stack lean can cause failures when feeding and refolding forms Synchronous Data Link Control SDLC For managing synchronous code transparent serial by bit information transfer over a link connection system reference code SRC A code that contains information such as a failing field replaceable unit for a customer engineer system programmer A programmer who plans generates maintains extends and controls the use of an operating system with the aim of improving overall productivity of an installation Contrast with application programmer Glossary 303 System 370 An upward compatible extension of the IBM System 360 A large collection of computing system devices that can be combined to produce a wide range of computing systems that share many characteristics including a common machine language 7 task A basic unit of work to be accomplished by a device or an operator TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol A set of communication protocols that support peer to peer connectivity functions for both local and wide area networks TCS Two channel switch tensile strength A measure of the force that the paper forms can withstand without tearing test mode The operational mode in w
162. configuration in dual simplex mode you must stop only the printer that is running the job you want to cancel To do this SELECT the Stop pushbutton on the main Display Touch Screen window of a simplex printer 2 On the Display Touch Screen main window SELECT the Cancel Job pushbutton 3 On the Cancel Job procedure window SELECT the OK pushbutton 4 Notify the host system console operator whenever you cancel a print job If necessary request that the job be resubmitted 78 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Changing the Password or Authorization Level This procedure lets you set the authorization level of the person that is working on the printer It also allows you to change the user authorization password Access to higher user authorization levels is password protected If you do not know the current password access to the requested user authorization level is denied The different levels of authorization are Operator No password is required for access to Operator procedures Key Operator The Key Operator has access to all functions except those that are related to the service and repair of the printer The following tasks require at least a Key Operator level of authorization Configure Printer Configure Attachments Configure Pre Postprocessor Traces Calibrate Touch Sensitive Screen Front Face Customer Engineer The service representative has access to all functions of the printer T
163. ct Keep sealed to reduce possibility of leakage Wipe up spillage completely to prevent slipping CAUT0105 1 Open the rear center and rear right covers of the printer 2 Remove the cap from the oil reservoir Put the cap in a safe place w Locate a bottle of fuser oil and a plastic spout Every new package should contain a bottle of fuser oil and a plastic spout Ensure that the spout is clean Remove the bottle lid and the inner seal Screw the spout onto the bottle of fuser oil N O 0O p Bend the spout and carefully place it into the oil reservoir opening m Operator Tip When you add fuser oil be careful to pour slowly A filter in the reservoir restricts the flow of fuser oil 8 Tip the fuser oil bottle to let the fuser oil drain into the oil reservoir 180 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide 10 11 12 13 HC60G070 Remove the spout and put the lid on the bottle If the bottle is empty discard the bottle and the spout If some oil remains store the bottle and spout in a clean dark place Ensure that the oil reservoir cap is clean Put the oil reservoir cap back in place Close the rear center and rear right covers of the printer To resume processing SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the main Display Touch Screen Chapter 7 Ordering and Replacing Supplies 181 Changing the Toner Cartridge Attent
164. ddress of the printer X X X X where X lt 255 in dotted decimal format Get this value from your LAN administrator This value must match the IP address value in the host PSF configuration This value is unique to a duplex system and is the same regardless of whether the printer is in duplex or dual simplex mode Subnet Mask Specifies the mask that identifies the local subnet in X X X X where X lt 255 dotted decimal format Get this value from your LAN administrator If you do not have a local subnet leave this field blank Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway in dotted X X X X where X lt 255 Address decimal format Get this value from your LAN administrator Standard MTU Size _ Specifies the Maximum Transmission Unit MTU size 60 to 1500 The MTU size for Standard Ethernet type ranges from 60 to 1500 TEEE802 3 MTU Size Specifies the MTU size for IEEE802 3 Ethernet type The 60 to 1492 range is from 60 to 1492 Chapter 8 Configuring the System 237 Table 20 Ethernet TCP IP Attachment Items continued Configuration Item Description Value Options Ethernet Type Specifies either the Standard or the IEEE802 3 Ethernet type Standard or IEEE802 3 Hardware address Alternate address Local adapter address Cable type Specifies the TCP IP Token Ring adapter ROM address Sets the unique LAN adapter address for the network The
165. down menu 2 Perform this task only for fan fold forms that are to be stacked in the printer stacker or re folded in a postprocessing device This task has no benefit if the forms are processed by a postprocessing device that separates each page either by bursting or cutting processes the forms 3 In duplex mode use this procedure only on Printer 1 This procedure assumes the following e The Front Face Display Touch Screen window appears with the text message Next Page is Front Facing e The Ch procedure has been completed see eck Forms Alignment ae LI D T ee fA SLE NA i TU q 1 yl Le d oto yy eS J To check for a front facing page do the following HC6OG066 1 Ensure that the forms perforation is aligned with the correct forms length see 2 Look at the direction of the forms fold at the first fold 1 before the forms perforation at the length alignment mark If you cannot see the perforation raise the transfer station the perforation should be near the top of the raised transfer station e If the fold is an up fold the next page printed is a back facing page e If the fold is a down fold the next page printed is a front facing page 82 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Operate Configure Analyze Options Next page is Front facing Back Facing Cancel Help Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job
166. e Recovering from a Forms jami in the Postprocessing Device Clearing the Forms Path Transfer Station Area Fuser and Stacker Areas Stacker and Pendulum Area Suggestions for Preventing Jams Reporting Printer Usage Running Traces Adjusting the Preheat Temperature Poor Fusing Simplex Mode Forms Stick Together 2 8 Heat Damage Printer Running Thread Align Forms Forms Are Loaded Through Both Printers Threading Without Printing Print While Threading Forms Are Not Loaded In Printer 2 Threading Without Printing Print While Threading Forms Are Broken Between the Printers Threading Without Printing Printing While Threading Threading the Buffer Flipper Unit Straight Line Configuration Left Angle Configuration Unloading the Stacker Switching Printer Modes Dual Simplex Duplex Switching from Duplex to Dual Simplex Mode Switching from Dual Simplex to sii Mode Switching Print Resolution re 119 119 120 121 122 123 126 127 129 131 134 134 135 136 136 140 143 144 146 148 150 151 151 151 152 154 155 156 158 158 160 162 163 165 167 167 168 169 172 172 172 174 55 This chapter contains step by step instructions for performing most printer operator tasks The tasks of enabling and disabling attachments shutting down and restarting the system and controlling system power are grouped together in the front of the chapter The remaining tasks are not
167. e add or check a supply item Copyright IBM Corp 1998 175 Supplies For optimum reliability and print quality use IBM supplies which are engineered specifically for IBM printers Use the IBM Supplies Worksheet to help you order supplies for the printer before the system is delivered and to maintain a stock of supplies for continuous operation When a printer runs low on a supply item it displays a status message on the Display Touch Screen screen sounds an alarm and turns on an operator intervention light on top of the printer IBM recommends that you keep the following quantities on hand per print engine Item Suggested Quantity Toner 30 cartridges Developer mix 4 bottles Fuser oil 4 bottles Oiler belt 2 belts Fine filter 2 filters Splicing tape 72 rolls The estimated quantities are approximations for planning purposes only and do not represent a warranty a guarantee or a minimum The actual consumption depends on variables such as machine toner settings job stream percent toner coverage form characteristics temperature and humidity Also ensure that a toner certified vacuum cleaner is available for printer operators to use when they clean the printer IBM Supplies Worksheet Important Notes Concerning Supplies e Make sure to use the correct part numbers when you order new supplies Using the wrong developer or toner for example can cause serious print quality problems and force a servi
168. e Filter Changing the Fine Filter Changing the Oiler Belt Checking the Absorbent Pad in the Oil Pan Chapter 8 Configuring the System Changing the Language of eee Configuring the Printer Printer Configuration Information Configuring the Host Attachments Parallel Channel Configuration Information ESCON Channel Configuration Information Token Ring TCP IP Attachment Information Ethernet TCP IP Attachment Information FDDI TCP IP Attachment Information Configuring Preprocessing Postprocessing Devices Interfaces Pre Postprocessor Configuration Values Configuring Remote Access Defining Forms Duplex Configuration Worksheet Simplex Configuration Worksheet Form Identification Worksheets Form Identification Worksheet Chapter 9 Print er and Problem Solving Print Quality Probleme Sudden Failures Problem Solving Tips and Suggested Actions Chapter 10 Responding to SA Program Check Messages Soft Program Check Hard Program Checks Printer Error Messages Out Of Supplies Messages Intervention Required ee Status Messages Status Message Summary Messages with System Reference Codes 172 172 174 175 176 176 177 177 177 178 178 2179 182 186 188 191 200 201 204 212 217 218 219 220 229 232 234 235 237 239 241 243 245 247 251 258 263 264 265 266 268 269 271 272 n 212 273 27
169. e Form Name currently loaded if you select the Printer 1 Feed Page pushbutton c Prints pages for the queued job on Printer 1 starting on the page following the alignment page Printer 2 processes blank pages SELECT the Forms are Connected pushbutton SELECT the Feed to Align pushbutton on the Thread Align Forms window Pages for the queued job are printed on Printer 1 starting on the page following the alignment page Printer 2 processes blank pages Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 165 7 If the queued job is too short to print all pages on Printer 1 for the complete Length of Forms Between Transfer Points the printing process ceases The printers stop forward movement of the forms A message appears in the non selectable Information field on window informing you that there is No Data to Print In this case you may either e SELECT the No option in the Print While Threading Start pushbutton and follow the procedure steps in 2 Printing on page 163 Printing while threading cannot be accomplished with the current queued job e Periodically SELECT the Feed to Align pushbutton When more data is available forward movement of the forms while printing resumes until the Length of Forms Between Printers distance is achieved 8 If the queued job is long enough and the fixed length forms forward movement completes visually verify that the dashed alignment mark printed on Printer 1 is aligned to the alignment
170. e If you selected this procedure from the Operate pull down menu the Thread Align Forms procedure closes with no actions taken e If this procedure appeared automatically the Thread Align Forms procedure closes However any later attempt to make the printer Ready causes an Intervention Required Display Touch Screen window containing a D206 SRC to appear This requires SELECTING the Thread Align Forms procedure and executing it before any printing actions can resume Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 153 Options Analyze Operate Configure Thread Align Forms Print While Threading Before starting this procedure you must have ere i l Printer 1 o Loaded printer 1 No Feed Page o Aligned the perforation in printer PPR 1 if using perforated forms Yes Printer 2 o Completed the Assign Form to O Oooo Fi P Load procedure to specify the eed Page form being loaded Select No or Yes in the Print While Forms are Threading field Connected Feed Forms Start Completed Cancel plete Help Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job Figure 31 Main Thread Align Forms Window A2300113 3 SELECT the OK pushbutton on the window The main Thread Align Forms procedure window appears Forms Are Loaded Through Both Printers These procedures assume the following e You have visually checked the forms path through Printer 1 between Printer 1 and
171. e error C003 Microcode update failed C004 Microcode update failed C005 X Window event D080 MIC abort Chapter 10 Responding to Messages 287 Table 30 SRC Messages continued Code Message Text Type Printer Error unless noted otherwise D081 MIC permanent error D082 MIC failure during diagnostics D083 MIC failure during initial power on EPROM diagnostics D084 MIC microcode error D090 MIC failure during attention light test D091 MIC failure during printer activate test D092 MIC failure during printer interface test D093 MIC failure during alarm test D095 MIC failure during intelligent interface wrap test D096 MIC failure during coupled interface wrap test D097 MIC failure during pre postprocessor run motor test D098 MIC failure during pre postprocessor offset test D099 MIC failure during printer dormant test D201 Fuser warming timeout D202 Pre postprocessor PAUSE was active more than 100 seconds D203 Pre postprocessor STOP line became active D204 Pre postprocessor NOT READY line became active D205 PAGE COMPLETE timeout D206 Ready was selected before threading forms Intervention Required D208 Communication with the MIC has failed D20A Pre postprocessor BUSY was active too long D20B Incorrect printer speed D20C Form length mismatch D20D Form width mismatch D20E Pre postproc
172. e heat or humidity Extended exposure to these extremes can damage the materials permanently Relative humidity levels above 65 may reduce print quality 178 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Adding Fuser Oil m Attention You may leave printer power on while you perform this task but the printer should not be printing pane the wrong fuser oil can cause print quality problems See Hable 15 onl for the correct part number Do this task when you see the following message o FUSER OIL 7 el eee R4C00001 4 You need the following items when you add fuser oil e Fuser oil bottle e Plastic spout which is packaged with the oil e Paper towels Note You do not have to replace fuser oil the first time you see the ADD FUSER OIL message To bypass the message SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the main Display Touch Screen The ADD FUSER OIL message reappears each time end of forms is reached or every 4 000 feet of forms thereafter When 50 000 additional feet of forms have been processed since the message originally appeared you must add fuser oil before you can return the printer to Ready status Chapter 7 Ordering and Replacing Supplies 179 HC60G046 CAUTION lt 75 gt When adding fuser oil Avoid contact with eyes Wash hands with soap and water after use Flush eyes thoroughly in case of accidental conta
173. e levers to the left the tractors are free to move forward or backward to the required form width Release the lever when you have reached the correct distance A scale to the right of the tractors allows you to preset the tractors to the closest approximate setting before you load the forms Chapter 3 Functional Areas 25 Puller Control Lever The puller lever is on the left side of the input area When you press the lever pressure is released on the scuff and backup rollers inside the fuser area The lever is spring loaded so pressure returns to the scuff and backup rollers when you release the puller lever ii J HC60G063 Fuser Entry Area After they receive print images the forms pass through the fuser entry area toward the fuser In the fuser area heat and pressure from the fuser heat roll bond the print images onto the forms 26 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Stacker Area Printed and fused fan fold forms leave the fuser area and are refolded in the stacker area acke F on Q an on q describe the stacker area controls in detail Note Roll feed forms do not use the stacker area They require a postprocessor The pendulum is inside the stacker area above the stacker table The swinging of the pendulum helps the forms to refold correctly
174. e old Form Name 6 To define a new form do the following a SELECT the New Form pushbutton b Use the keyboard to enter the name you choose for the new form c SELECT the keyboard OK pushbutton d The new form is added to the list and is initially assigned the same values as the previous form e To change these values see the next step 7 To change a form definition do the following a SELECT the form you want to change The current definition appears b SELECT the field you want to change You see either a pop up window or a keypad window c SELECT the new value you want from the pop up window or enter data on the keypad window and SELECT the OK pushbutton 248 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Setting the Preheat Platen Temperature The Preheat selection in the Forms Characteristics box allows you to adjust the temperature of the preheat platen for optimum fusing of different types of forms such as labels or heavy stock forms The default temperature is 80 C which is acceptable for regular forms If you are defining a form that requires a preheat platen temperature above or below 80 C you can enter another temperature in increments of 5 that is you can enter temperatures such as 70 75 85 or 90 C The minimum temperature you can set is 45 C the maximum temperature you can set is 100 C Operate Analyze Options Configure Printer Status Define Forms
175. e that has been exposed onto the photoconductor and covered with toner by the developer developer mix A combination of carrier beads and toner in which the beads electrically charge the toner diagnostic Pertaining to the detection and isolation of errors in programs and faults in equipment diagnostic mode The operational mode in which the printer can check itself in case of a malfunction When the InfoPrint 3000 is in diagnostic mode it is not accepting information from the attached controlling computer system In the InfoPrint 3000 only service representatives can use diagnostic mode Contrast with print mode and test mode direct attach The environment in which an application program directly allocates the InfoPrint 3000 printing subsystem dishing The curve a stack of forms takes when folded or refolded at the fold perforation diskette A thin flexible magnetic disk enclosed in a protective jacket Document Composition Facility DCF An IBM licensed program that provides text formatting for the InfoPrint 3000 double byte character set DBCS A set of characters in which each character is reperesented by a 2 byte code Languages such as Japanese Chinese and Korean which contain more symbols that can be reprented by 256 code points require double byte character sets Because each character requires 2 bytes the typing display and printing of DBCS characters requires hardware and programs that support DBCS
176. e the tension on the stacker feed rollers and straighten the forms Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 109 HC60G068 26 Open the stacker gate 1 Check that the forms are folding correctly on their original folds Press the Forms Feed button to feed additional forms into the stacker if necessary 110 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide HC60G047 27 Slide the stacker forms width handle close to the edge of the forms without wrinkling the forms 28 Close the stacker gate Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 111 AT THE TRANSFER STATION HC60G094 29 Press the Forms Feed pushbutton to line up a page perforation with the forms scale on the rear tractor cover until the perforation is aligned with the correct number for the length of the form you are loading HC60G074 30 Determine the folding direction of the first perforation 2 below the slots 1 on the input forms guide 112 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide HC60G001 e If the fold is pointing to the left press the forms set on the left e If the fold is pointing to the right press the forms set on the right 31 Close the top and front covers Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 113 114 AT THE DISPLAY TOUCH SCREEN 32 33 34 35 36 37 Operate Configure Analyze Options Help Printer Status Assign Form to
177. e5 FDDI TCP IP Configuration Installed Yes No TCP Port 5001 to 65536 IP Address X X X X where X lt 255 Subnet Mask X X X X where X lt 255 Default Gateway Address X X X X where X lt 255 MTU Size 256 to 4352 Hardware address Cannot be changed N A N A N A Alternate address X 0 to X FFFFFFFFFFFF Confine Broadcast Yes No Table 24 Configuration Worksheet Duplex Models continued Selected Values Item Available Values Duplex Dual Simplex Printer 1 Printer 2 PREPROCESSING POSTPROCESSING INTERFACE CONFIGURATIONS DEVICE Number Printer Number 1 2 N A N A Port Number 1 2 3 Enabled Yes No Name 1 to 12 alphanumeric characters including spaces Type e Coupled Preprocessor e Coupled Postprocessor e Advanced Postprocessor MICR e Advanced Postprocessor SMM Select Medium Modification Characteristics Pre Postprocessor Extended NPRO Pre Postprocessor Busy Timer 0 to 800 inches 1 to 999 seconds Postprocessor Tag Type e Coupled e RSI Compatible Distance to Postprocessor e 24 to 800 inches e 24 to 1200 inches Postprocessor Error Page Stop 0 to 50 pages Postprocessor Verify Alignment Page Stop 0 to 5000 pages Name Pre Postprocessor Baud Rate in 19 2 or 62 5 Kbps DEVICE Number Printer Number 1 2 N A N A Port Number 1 2 3 Enabled Yes No 1 to 12 alphanumeric characters including spaces Type e
178. ecially between the transfer station and the fuser entry area can cause severe paper cuts CAUT0102 Danger Notices Danger notices make users aware of hazards that can cause serious injury or death The following are examples of danger notices DANGER lt 5 gt High voltage is present Use care while working in this area DANGO104 DANGER lt 9 gt Laser radiation is present Do not remove this cover when printer power is on DANG0108 Notices xXX Safety Notices Electrical Safety The printers are inspected and listed by recognized national testing laboratories Underwriters Laboratories UL Inc in the U S A Canadian Standards Association CSA in Canada and TUV Rheinland Listing of a product by a national testing laboratory indicates that the product is designed and manufactured in accordance with national requirements intended to minimize safety hazards Remember however that this product operates under conditions of high electrical potentials and heat generation both of which are functionally necessary Note In the U S A and Canada this product is equipped with a required country approved plug for the user s safety Use it in conjunction with a correctly grounded receptacle In all other countries the power cable is supplied without a plug Provide the appropriate plug and compatible receptacle Understand the electrical standards for your country and use only an approved plug Your
179. ed off the forms in the stacker decrease the preheat temperature by 5 degrees Run several hundred feet of forms to stabilize the temperature Check the fusing to see if it is acceptable If the fusing is acceptable but forms stick together in the stacker decrease the temperature by another 5 degrees and try printing again If adequate fusing does not occur without forms sticking together the forms may be unacceptable for use on the printers Adjust the Contrast switch on the printer control panel to the lowest possible setting that produces acceptable print quality Remember to adjust the contrast setting on both printers so that the contrast is balanced between the front and back side of the forms Change the Forms Select setting on the stacker control panel to C if it is not already at that setting Check the fusing to see if it is acceptable If unacceptable return the Forms Select to the previous setting Increasing the print contrast may also improve fusing of solid areas and bar codes Heat Damage Printer Running If heat damage melting or curling occurs to forms or labels while the printer is running set the temperature to a lower value before you continue printing Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 151 Thread Align Forms Select this task when you load forms in duplex mode This procedure is also automatically called when the system is powered on in duplex mode and during some error and jam recovery procedur
180. ed to the printer If a forms jam occurs in the postprocessing device that causes a Not Ready condition the Intervention Required window appears on the Display Touch Screen The D204 SRC code appears on the window Operate Configure Analyze Options Intervention Code Directions Intervention Required Pre postprocessor NOT READY line became active D204 Check the pre postprocessor for errors Make the pre postprocessor ready Select Ready and retry operation Call for service if the problem continues vV Completed Postpone Ready Check Reset Jam Recovery Help NPRO Cancel Job 1 Remove the jammed forms from the postprocessing device 2 If you want to reprint pages SELECT the Jam Recovery pushbutton on the Intervention Required window 3 SELECT the Completed pushbutton on the Intervention Required window You do not have to wait between SELECTING the Jam Recovery and Completed pushbuttons 4 SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities NWTM0930 135 Clearing the Forms Path 136 HC60G050 Transfer Station Area 1 Open the top left and front left center covers Attention Do not use the Forms Feed pushbutton on the printer Display Touc
181. educe the potential for causing interference to radio and TV communication and to other electrical or electronic equipment Such cables and connectors are available from IBM authorized dealers IBM cannot be responsible for any interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors Japanese VCCI CORBI B BGRAR ATER HO CRASSA WREE CHLAWRCORRES MILT AME LCR ES ERM ERS Be VCCI eB MaL Te baT Got FSWM ECA TORR LIMMCEAT SOL Goa ee ee RUGRASC BERR Se Se acc ahnset MIRA ICG a TEL RORU SLT Fas VECI Notices X X Taiwan EMC Fn RR A xe 8 1 TLE ot me fe A IF gt T Oe MIVA THE o A IERT o AA SRE RAR we ih FAR Ro si Safety Notice Conventions This publication contains safety notices that warn users of situations that could cause them harm Caution Notices Caution notices make users aware of hazards that can cause minor or moderate personal injuries such as cuts or burns The following notices are examples of the kinds of caution notices that can appear in an Operator s Guide CAUTION lt 70 gt The oiler belt oiler wick roll and their environments are high temperature areas Be very careful when working in these areas CAUT0100 XX InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide CAUTION lt 72 gt As you load forms be careful to avoid injuries The tractor covers are spring loaded and can pinch if they snap shut unexpectedly Moving forms esp
182. em is set to Simplex mode this Printer selectable field is grayed out in the Configure Pre Postprocessors window All devices configured while in Simplex mode are automatically configured for the printer associated with Display Touch Screen you are currently using The physical connection between the printer and the preprocessing postprocessing device 1or2 lor2or3 Enabled Enables a device for a port If a device is already enabled for a specific port number when you select a device that is also configured for that port number the Yes is grayed out so that you cannot attempt to enable a second device for the same port An error window appears when the restart procedure to activate this change is complete and either of the following conditions exist e You attempted to enable a device for a port number that does not have an interface adaptor installed or e The adapter has a different type Pre Post versus AF Post adaptor installed than the device type you are enabling Yes or No Pre Postprocessor Type Specify a Coupled type when the port to be used has a Pre Post type adaptor installed Specify an Advanced Postprocessor type when the port to be used has a AF Post type adaptor installed Different types have different Pre Postprocessor Characteristics configuration items listed Options Include e Coupled Preprocessor e Coupled Postprocessor e Advanced Postprocessor MICR e Advanced Postprocessor
183. en working in these areas CAUT0116 CAUT0100 g If forms remain in the fuser do the following Open the oiler belt gate Lower the hot roll shield Remove any forms you see Raise the hot roll shield Close the oiler belt gate 9 Return to the appropriate lam message listed in Table 12 on page 123 able 13 or 9295p 142 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide HC60G068 Stacker and Pendulum Area 1 Open the stacker gate 1 2 Ensure that the forms are folding correctly that is the forms stack lies flat without bowing between forms 3 Ensure that the Forms Set indicator on the Printer Control Panel is set to match the direction of the first fold perforation that is below the red mark on the forms guide 4 Separate the forms at the perforation near the top of the stacker Save as much of the output as possible Work with the host system console operator to recover any lost pages 5 Unload forms from the stacker Note When you remove the forms from the stacker leave 4 to 5 pages attached to the end of the job running in the stacker This ensures that the forms folding is correct when printing resumes See 6 Ensure that the correct forms length and width are selected at the Stacker Control Panel 7 If you receive a message when no forms appear jammed clean the six stacker jam sensors and two mirrors with a soft dry cloth See step Bo on page od under 4 n Chapter 6
184. en you increase the vertical value by one you move the origin down toward the trailing page perforation by one pel e When you decrease the vertical value by one you move the origin up toward the leading page perforation by one pel 10 To print a sample to test the new values do step A again 11 If the registration is still not correct repeat steps H through id 12 If the registration is satisfactory SELECT the OK pushbutton on the Adjust Print window 13 Make the printer Ready by SELECTING the Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen window for the affected printer m Operator Tips e After the printer has run for a few seconds SELECT the Stop pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen window for the affected printer Then look at the output to ensure that the print position is still correct Sometimes the print position changes slightly when forms move at full speed e Most applications generate a few sample pages at the beginning of each job so that you can adjust the forms without losing any output If you need more sample pages to test ask the host system console operator to restart the job Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 73 Adjusting the Volume of the Operator Alert Assembly The operator alert assembly has the following main parts e Built in operator alert light and buzzer e Volume control e External contacts that allow you to connect an alert signal of your choice See
185. ent See Adjusting the Print ge 469 for more information Remote Access Lets you enable and configure remote access to the printer via Simple Chapter 5 Task Summary 47 Network Management Protocol SNMP Remote Management Interface RMI and Modem See more information 48 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Analyze Pull Down Menu Figure 13 shows the selections available on the Analyze pull down menu Operate Configure Analyze Options Service Actions Traces Print Samples Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job Figure 13 Analyze Pull Down Menu HC60G090 7 Service Actions Used only by a service representative and protected by a Customer Engineer user authorization level password Traces Lets you select a trace to run start the trace stop the trace save a trace to diskette and print selected traces See Ru more information Print Samples Lets you print a variety of sample pages See for more information Chapter 5 Task Summary 49 Options Pull Down Menu Figure 14 shows the selections available on the Options pull down menu Operate Configure Analyze Options Assign Form to Load Enable Disable Attachments Password Change Language Clean Screen Calibrate Touch Screen Front Face Special Features Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job A HC60G091 Figure
186. er are provided on Models ES1 and ED1 This allows input capabilities and output capabilities beyond the standard forms input source and output stacker in the system printers All other models are equipped with one preprocessing postprocessing device interface as standard equipment Your company can purchase additional interfaces Printer Characteristics The InfoPrint 3000 printers are nonimpact all points addressable printers The printers each use a laser electrophotographic print technology and Advanced Function Presentation AFP licensed programs to create high quality text and graphic printer output The printers use continuous forms in a variety of sizes styles and weights including preprinted forms and some adhesive labels Note Duplex mode does not support printing on adhesive labels After printing the forms may be stacked in the printer stacker or processed by an optional postprocessing device Nonimpact printing when combined with all points addressability allows graphics and many different type sizes and styles to appear on a single page The printers can be used for text image graphic optical character recognition OCR and bar code printing Text images and electronic overlays can be placed at any defined point on the page areas on which the printers can print System Components Model ED1 This model includes Printer engine Printer Utility Module PUM This unit includes Operator al
187. er station to its full upright position to ensure that the drum is completely covered HC60G041 CAUTION lt 71 gt The tractor covers are spring loaded and can pinch if they snap shut unexpectedly CAUT0101 Open the upper tractor covers Use a soft cloth to clean the upper tractor jam sensor the glass window under the upper front tractor cover If necessary use a pencil eraser to remove forms residue Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and debris around the upper tractor pins Close the upper tractor covers Clean the static discharge brush on the transfer station Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 93 6 0D099H 20 Raise the transfer station 94 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide S60D099H eoceseceo pooceed socoeo ceo ooo 8 Open the lower tractor covers 21 22 Vacuum the lower tractor pins to remove forms dust and debris 23 Close the lower tractor covers S20D099H f do the following 1 24 To clean the transfer corona 3 95 Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities Important Note About Cleaning the Coronas There is no device to prevent you from pulling out the coronas Be careful not to break the thin wires and tiny retractor springs inside the corona assemblies HC60G024 wl ait d3 gt w Gently pull the white corona toward you until it is almost out of its track A
188. er 200 forms alignment 84 print samples 85 cleaning brush corona 91 charge corona 90 developer area 90 forms input area 92 oiler belt 86 88 preclean corona 90 printer 88 rear service area 99 sensors EOF 92 stacker area 95 97 static discharge 93 tools required paper towels 88 vacuum cleaner toner certified 88 transfer corona 95 transfer station area 93 vacuum cleaner 88 clearances 293 clearing forms jams jams between postprocessing 126 prevention suggestions 144 procedures 126 procedures duplex mode 127 134 procedures simplex mode 121 126 transfer station area 136 clearing the forms path fuser and stacker areas 140 jams between postprocessing 126 stacker and pendulum area 143 transfer station area 136 clock symbol 41 collector toner 177 concurrent procedures 39 configuration worksheets attachments 251 258 forms 263 printer 251 258 supplies 176 configure pull down menu 47 configuring remote access 245 configuring the system attachments 229 Display Touch Screen language 218 ESCON channels 234 Ethernet attachments 237 FDDI attachments 239 forms definitions 247 parallel channels 232 preprocessing postprocessing devices 241 printer 219 procedures 217 265 token ring attachments 235 worksheets 251 258 connecting accessories customer alert device 101 control unit functional area 17 controlling system power 56 60 corona charge 90 cleaning brush 91 preclean 90 transfer 95 cues vi
189. er 4 Using the Display Touch Screen 35 Delete Home End Left Right Backspace Caps Shift Lock In Insert mode characters you select are inserted at the cursor position moving any existing characters to the right In Overwrite mode characters you select are typed at the cursor position directly over existing characters Erases an existing character at the cursor position Moves the cursor to the beginning the left side of the entry field Moves the cursor to the end right side of the entry field Moves the cursor one character space to the left Moves the cursor one character space to the right Erases an existing character to the left of the cursor Alphanumeric Keyboard Only Acts as a switch to change keyboard entries from lowercase to uppercase or uppercase to lowercase Alphanumeric Keyboard Only Affects only the next character you enter by changing the case upper or lower set by the Caps key to the opposite case Alphanumeric Keyboard Only Acts as a switch between locked and unlocked mode for uppercase characters which is set by the Caps key Operate E Configure Analyze Options Enter the Form Width in inches Valid range 9 to 16 B Overwrite Cancel Home Insert Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job A2300110 a Figure 5 Numeric Keypad Window 36 InfoPrint 3000 Operato
190. er control unit computer will use for font management Select the font usage according to the type of print jobs you run Select Low font usage for jobs using a normal number of fonts with normal point sizes but not double byte fonts Medium font usage indicates an abnormal single byte character set SBCS printing mode select it for jobs using a large number of fonts or very large point sizes but not double byte fonts High font usage is primarily for double byte font jobs Low Medium or High Page Segment Usage This is used to allocate space for IPDS source for page segments and overlays Set to Low if the size or number of page segments and overlays is a small Set to High if the size or number of page segments and overlays is large Low Medium or High Overlay Usage This parameter is used to allocate space for a cache of ready to print overlays Set to Low if a few small overlays are used Set to High if many or large overlays are used Low Medium or High Overlay Cache This parameter is used to activate or deactivate overlay caching Set to No if overlays are not reused multiple times or if overlays are not reused in the same location on subsequent pages Yes or No Input Buffer Size Output Buffer Size This parameter is used to allocate space for the IPDS data that was just received from the server before being processed by the control unit Set to Low if pages contain little data or if pri
191. er the tab 1 Rotate the upper oiler belt roll to remove slack in the belt HC60G073 If you are ae the oiler belt and you removed the oil pan that is shown above in step reinstall the pan now Raise the hot roll shield Close the oiler belt gate Turn the wing nut clockwise to latch the gate Ensure that the gate is firmly latched Close the stacker end cover The message may change to WARMING UP or PLEASE STAND BY 210 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide 24 To resume processing SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the main Display Touch Screen 25 Place the old oiler belt inside the plastic bag and discard it Chapter 7 Ordering and Replacing Supplies 211 Checking the Absorbent Pad in the Oil Pan Not every printer has an oil pan and absorbent pad Your CE may install these if they are necessary for optimum printer operation Attention You may leave printer power on while you perform this task but the printer should not be printing HC60G052 CAUTION lt 70 gt The oiler belt oiler wick roll and their environments are high temperature areas Be very careful when working in these areas CAUT0100 1 Open the stacker end cover Note When the oiler belt gate is opened the fuser begins to cool down immediately and the message changes to OILER GATE OPEN 2 Turn the wing nut counterclockwise to release the oiler belt gate 3 Place several lay
192. ers of absorbent material such as paper towels on the floor beneath the oiler belt gate 212 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide 4 Open the oiler belt gate i i ite ha EN gt Ae ico a At i i HC60G051 5 Check to see if the absorbent pad is saturated with oil If the pad is saturated continue with step H If it is not saturated go to step ion page 215 6 Allow the printer to cool for at least 30 minutes 7 Lower the hot roll shield Chapter 7 Ordering and Replacing Supplies 213 HC60G048 8 Remove the oil pan by lifting the pan until the hooked portion of the pan is disengaged from the lower oiler belt support shaft 9 Remove the new absorbent pad from the plastic shipping bag 10 Remove the saturated absorbent pad from the oil pan 11 Place the saturated pad in the plastic shipping bag and discard the bag in an approved waste container 12 Install the new absorbent pad in the oil pan 214 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 HC60G073 Install the oil pan onto the lower oiler belt support shaft Raise the hot roll shield Close the oiler belt gate Turn the wing nut clockwise to latch the gate Ensure that the gate is firmly latched Close the stacker end cover The message may change to WARMING UP or PLEASE STAND BY To resume processing SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the main Displ
193. ert assembly Power control panel System interconnection electronics Preprocessing postprocessing device interfaces Models ES1 and ED2 These models include Printer engine Advanced Function Common Control Unit AFCCU which includes Operator alert assembly Power control panel IBM RISC technology processor XGA touch screen Display Touch Screen System interconnection electronics and cables Preprocessing postprocessing device interfaces Model ED2 This model also includes Buffer Flipper Unit This unit guides the paper path from the first printer to the second printer in this dual printer configuration The unit allows the forms to take the following paths from the first printer to the second printer Straight through path inline with 180 inversion Left 90 path with 180 inversion Urge unit Chapter 1 Introduction 3 This power driven roller assembly is on the floor in the forms input area of the second printer of the system the continuous forms are threaded through it It assists in feeding forms from the Buffer Flipper Unit under the printer into the tractor feed area of the printer Duplex Printing Applications 4 The following configurations support Duplex double sided printing Duplex printing is achieved by arranging both a Model ED1 and a Model ED2 in series separated by a Buffer Flipper Unit The first printer in the paper path prints one side of a form The forms then
194. es All of the controls you need to accomplish this procedure are available on the Display Touch Screen windows This procedure initially displays a Setup Thread Align Forms window see Notes 1 2 Operate Proper completion of this task is important to ensure that Printer 2 prints side 2 pages correctly opposite the side 1 pages that were previously printed by Printer 1 You can print verification marks on both sides of the pages by using the Verification marks Printer Configuration Item You can then visually inspect these marks to ensure that sides 1 and 2 of the forms are properly synchronized See 4 for more information The dashed line is used to align the forms in the printers The solid line is used to align postprocessing equipment if any is attached Configure Analyze Options Thread Align Forms Before starting this procedure you must Select the Starting Condition have Completed the Assign Form to Load procedure to specify the Forms are loaded through both printers form being loaded o Loaded printer 1 Forms are not loaded in Printer 2 o Aligned the perforation in printer 1 if using perforated forms Forms are broken between the printers Select your starting condition and then select OK to continue Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job A2300166 Figure 30 Setup Window for Thread Align Forms 1 SELECT which of
195. es Stop Pre Postprocessor Baud Rate in 19 2 or 62 5 Kbps DEVICE Number Printer Number 1 2 N A N A Port Number 1 2 3 256 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Table 24 Configuration Worksheet Duplex Models continued Item Available Values Selected Values Duplex Dual Simplex Printer 1 Printer 2 Enabled Yes No Name 1 to 12 alphanumeric characters including spaces Type e Coupled Preprocessor e Coupled Postprocessor e Advanced Postprocessor MICR e Advanced Postprocessor SMM Select Medium Modification Characteristics Pre Postprocessor Extended NPRO 0 to 800 inches Pre Postprocessor Busy Timer 1 to 999 seconds Postprocessor Tag Type e Coupled e RSI Compatible e Advanced Distance to Postprocessor Postprocessor Error Page Stop e 24 to 800 inches e 24 to 1200 inches 0 to 50 pages Postprocessor Verify Alignment Page Stop 0 to 5000 pages Pre Postprocessor Baud Rate in Kbps 19 2 or 62 5 Chapter 8 Configuring the System 257 Simplex Configuration Worksheet Table 25 Configuration Worksheet Simplex Model Item Available Values Selected Value MESSAGE DISPLAY LANGUAGE US English e Spanish e French e German e Japanese e Italian e Brazilian Portuguese e Chinese Simplified e Chinese Traditional CONFIGURE PRINTER Auto Start Yes No PQE boldnes
196. ess 00 to FF Hexadecimal Multi host Environmental Flag True False Card 1 Slot Position 2 4 Not Installed Automatically set at power on cannot be changed Card 2 Slot Position 2 4 Not Installed Automatically set at power on cannot be changed Token Ring TCP IP Configuration Installed Yes No TCP Port 5001 to 65536 IP Address X X X X where X 255 Subnet Mask X X X X where X 255 Default Gateway Address X X X X where X 255 MTU Size 60 to 4096 Hardware address Cannot be changed Alternate address X 0 to X FFFFFFFFFFFF Ring Speed 4 or 16 Confine Broadcast Yes No Ethernet TCP IP Configuration Installed Yes No TCP Port 5001 to 65536 IP Address X X X X where X 255 Subnet Mask X X X X where X 255 Default Gateway Address X X X X where X 255 Standard MTU Size 60 to 1500 TEEE8023 MTU Size Ethernet Type 60 to 1492 Standard or IEEE8023 Hardware address Cannot be changed Alternate address X 0 to X FFFFFFFFFFFF Cable type 10Base2 or 10Base5 PREPROCESSING POSTPROCESSING INTERFACE CONFIGURATIONS DEVICE Number Port Number 1 2 3 Enabled Yes No Name 1 to 12 alphanumeric characters including spaces 260 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Table 25 Configuration Worksheet Simplex Model continued Item Availa
197. ess for printer 1 PQE boldness for printer 2 Printer 1 Counter 100 Note This value must not be changed 100 Note This value must not be changed CE Change Only 0 to 2 000 000 000 Printer 2 Counter CE Change Only 0 to 2 000 000 000 Printhead resolution not all values are supported on all printers 480 DPI 600 DPI 480 600 DPI IPDS Resolution e Automatic 240 DPI 300 DPI 600 DPI Font Enhancement Single Byte Font Double Byte Font Yes No Jam Recovery Type e Use Normal Jam Repositioning e Suppress MICR Jam Repositioning e Suppress All Jam Repositioning Font Usage Low Medium High Page Segment Usage Low Medium High Overlay Usage Low Medium High Chapter 8 Configuring the System 251 Table 24 Configuration Worksheet Duplex Models continued Selected Values Item Available Values Duplex Dual Simplex Printer 1 Printer 2 Overlay Cache Yes No Input Buffer Size Low Medium High Output Buffer Size Low Medium High Direct Attach Yes No NPRO Length 0 to 1200 inches Auto NPRO at EOF Yes No Jam Recovery Point Distance 0 to 500 inches Form Feed Length Duplex Mode 17 to 250 inches N A N A Only Length of Forms Between Transfer 150 to 800 inches
198. essor processor power is off D20F Undefined character received by intelligent interface D210 Illegal position received by intelligent interface D211 Illegal media modification received by intelligent interface D212 MICR data received while MICR option disabled D213 Availability of intelligent postprocessor has changed D214 Intelligent postprocessor forms jam D215 MIC to intelligent interface communications failure D216 Intelligent interface response timeout D217 Command rejected by intelligent interface D218 Intelligent interface responded but is not in configuration D219 Intelligent interface type not recognized D21A Intelligent postprocessor restarted 288 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Table 30 SRC Messages continued Code Message Text Type Printer Error unless noted otherwise D21B Intelligent postprocessor failed to clear buffer D21C PAGE COMPLETE not sent by intelligent interface D21E Side 2 Verify has stopped checking pages D702 Out of data while printing D703 Printer unable to do requested command D705 Printhead overrun while printing D706 BEAM DETECT was not received D707 Loss of printer DVS vertical sync pulse D70B Printhead underrun D70C Print buffers out of sequence D70D DVS vertical sync pulse frequency error D70E Mechanism Interface Card MIC parity error D70F MIC Print Quality Enhancement PQE err
199. ew developer mix bottle is empty press the Developer Run Pushbutton A again 19 Clean the empty developer mix bottle with a cloth or paper towel to remove any excess developer mix Store the bottle in the recess at the right of the forms input area in front of the drain hose for the next time you change developer mix m Operator Tip If you already have several empty developer mix bottles in storage you may discard the extra bottle 198 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide 20 21 22 23 24 HC60G020 m Attention Never operate the printer when the developer inlet cover is removed Put the developer inlet cover back in place Clean the developer area with a cloth or paper towel to remove any spilled developer mix Replace the forms in the forms input area so that printing may continue Close the covers of the printer To resume processing SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the main Display Touch Screen Chapter 7 Ordering and Replacing Supplies 199 Checking the Fine Filter l F 1 t U AA ei 0 00 SS HC60G071 Do this task when you see the following message cecx FINE FILTER 0799 Note You must do this task immediately You cannot delay it as you can with some Out of Supplies conditions From the rear of the printer open the rear center cover Ensure tha
200. exit the printer through a Buffer Flipper Unit which inverts them before threading them through the second printer The second printer in the paper path prints the other side of the form This publication calls the first printer Printer 1 and the second printer Printer 2 i or a left 90 angle see x ge 7 Only a Buffer Flipper Unit may be between ane 1 ae Pants 2 but no preprocessing or postprocessing devices The forms path can be e From the forms input area of Printer 1 through to the output stacker of Printer 2 e From the forms input area to a postprocessing device at the output of Printer 2 e From a preprocessing device ahead of Printer 1 through to a postprocessing device at the output of Printer 2 Both printers in the configuration attach to a host system through the AFCCU The AFCCU controls both printers simultaneously and is physically attached to Printer 2 in the configuration InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Simplex and Dual Simplex Printing Applications The configuration that is shown in bage d supports simplex single sided printing in the Dual Simplex mode on selected models see aed Both printers in the configuration can run independent simplex applications The forms path would start at the forms input area or preprocessing device and proceed through to either the printer output stacker or to a postprocessing device When the printing system is configured as dual simplex and one of the pri
201. f forms 270 FDDI attachment configuration 239 field menu non selectable 41 scroll bar 41 scroll box 41 selectable 41 filter fine 177 fine filter 177 checking 200 cover 32 replacing 201 finger belts 27 fingertip control 37 forms adding or changing 247 defining 247 306 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide forms continued definition 15 deleting 247 guide 26 identification worksheets 263 input functional area 22 jammed torn or separated 123 not jammed torn or separated 124 path 15 sticking together 151 unloading 169 forms loading load 102 forms alignment checking 84 guide line 26 scale 81 Forms Feed 29 Forms Feed key 24 FORMS LENGTH knob 30 Forms Select key 29 forms selection A setting 29 B setting 29 C setting 29 Forms Set 84 Forms Set indicators and key 24 FORMS WIDTH lever 30 Forward forms feed key 24 frequent stops and starts 270 front facing page 81 function keys not responding 269 functional areas 15 control unit 17 developer 20 forms input 22 forms path 15 fuser entry 26 pre post device switch 32 rear service 32 stacker 27 transfer station 22 funnel oil bottle 180 fuser entry area 26 fuser 124 gate 26 oil adding 179 oil reservoir 32 fuser oil 177 G grayed out text 41 H handling messages 271 291 hard program checks messages 273 help procedure windows 53 help window 52 hexpad symbol 41 hexpad window 35 horizontal print position 72 host controlled mode 58 hot roll 15
202. fer station and latch it 106 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide HC60G041 lo 18 Open the two upper tractor covers 19 Pull the forms tightly over the transfer station m Attention If the forms are not pulled tightly over the transfer station the photoconductor drum may be scratched It is easily damaged and is very expensive to replace When the transfer station is in its upright position the drum is automatically covered to prevent damage to the drum 20 Place the holes of the forms on the top tractor pins R4C00147 Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 107 0000 Feed Hole Tractor Pin R4C00146 21 Ensure that the feed holes on the forms are centered on the tractor pins and not beginning to tear If tearing is evident adjust the rear tractor assembly until the feed holes are centered on the tractor pins HC60G042 22 Carefully close the tractor covers 108 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide HC60G043 23 Fold the forms at the first perforation to make a double thickness Note Use the original fold of the form Do not fold the forms opposite to the original fold HC60G044 24 Pull the forms over the tension arm and feed the double thickness into the fuser 25 Press and hold the Forms Feed button to feed several feet of forms into the stacker Note If forms do not feed straight into the fuser releas
203. g field SELECT the Start pushbutton SELECT the Forms are Connected pushbutton SELECT the Feed to Align pushbutton on the Thread Align Forms window a This prints a solid alignment mark after the leading edge on a page in Printer 1 which is designated as an alignment page A2300158 Pe Ors 156 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide A one bar or two bar pattern is also printed on the alignment page The bar shows whether Side 1 or Side 2 of the form is being printed on Printer 1 This prints a dashed alignment mark after the leading edge of the page b This feeds a fixed length of forms through both Printer 1 and Printer 2 The fixed length is based on the Length of Forms Between Transfer Points configuration item length shown on the Configure Printer window under the Configure pull down menu It is a multiple of the current loaded Form Name page length that is closest to the Length of Forms Between Transfer Points length without exceeding it c Pages for the queued job are printed on Printer 1 starting on the page following the alignment page Printer 2 processes blank pages 5 If the queued job is too short to print all pages on Printer 1 for the complete Length of Forms Between Transfer Points the printing process ceases The printers stop forward movement of the forms A message appears in the non selectable Information field on the window informing you that there is No Data to Print In this case you may
204. ge to the printer stacker table switch power on to any postprocessing device before you switch power on to the printer to which it is attached For the same reason switch power off to the postprocessing device last If a preprocessing or postprocessing device stops before the printer becomes Ready the printer cannot detect that the device is stopped A forms jam results when printing begins Enabling Disabling Pre Post Interfaces The service representative configures attached preprocessing and postprocessing devices at time of their installation and sets the state of each device to Enabled or Disabled As configurations change from time to time you may have to change the preprocessing postprocessing device interface configurations and to enable or disable the devices Make these changes from the Display Touch Screen windows If a burster trimmer stacker BTS or an offsetter postprocessing device is to have its enabled status changed you must make configuration changes in both the Configure Printer procedure see Configure Pre Postprocessor procedure see Configuring InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide For all other types of postprocessing devices and for all preprocessing devices you have to make enabled status changes in only the Configure Pre Post procedure Using the Printer Stacker If a postprocessing device is disabled or not yet configured you may continue to use boxed forms and the printer stacker
205. h Screen if forms are jammed in the transfer station 2 Break the forms at a perforation in the input area below the transfer station 3 Break the forms at a perforation between the tension arm area and the fuser entry area InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide HC60G039 4 Raise the transfer station away from the photoconductor drum m Attention The photoconductor drum is easily damaged and it is very expensive to replace When the transfer station is open the photoconductor drum is automatically covered to prevent damage to the drum CAUTION lt 73 gt Do not wear jewelry rings watches or bracelets when working in this area Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 137 CAUT0103 5 Open the lower transfer station tractor covers 6 Check for torn carrier strips oversized carrier holes and torn paper 7 Remove any torn forms carrier strips and paper chads from the lower tractor area 8 Close the lower tractor covers 9 Lower the transfer station and latch it securely into position 138 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide 10 11 12 13 14 lo HC60G041 Open the upper transfer station tractor covers Check for torn carrier strips oversized carrier holes and torn paper Remove any torn forms carrier strips and paper chads from the transfer station area the transfer corona and the retractors Close the upper tr
206. hard disk drive You must both install and enable the feature before it becomes functional Chapter 5 Task Summary 51 Help Pull Down Menu The Help pull down menu has only one choice General Help SELECTING General Help displays general information about the Display Touch Screen Operate Configure Analyze Options General Help Select a Topic About the Console Locating Procedures Switching between Procedures Using Help Close The operator console you are using consists of the following Main Title Bar Located at the top of the console the main title bar indicates the model ant type of printer Main Menu Bar Located just below the main title bar the main menu bar consists of five menu bar choices that are associated with groups of procedures The menu bar choices on the main menu bar are o Operate Configure Analyze Options Help oooo Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job Figure 15 General Help Window 52 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide A2300131 Additional Help All procedure windows contain a Help pushbutton which displays information about performing the procedure This information usually includes a summary of the procedure directions for performing the procedure and an explanation of each pushbutton in the procedure window For example selecting the Help pushbutt
207. hat is already printed on Printer 1 is printed on Printer 2 and Printer 1 processes a blank page A page already printed in Printer 1 at the start of this procedure and a page printed in Printer 2 during this procedure are fused as they move toward their respective stacker areas 76 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Simplex Mode e When the printer is stopped under the Operate pull down menu SELECT the NPRO Page pushbutton on Display Touch Screen window e Forms advance through the printer to the next top of page position Duplex Mode e When both printers are stopped under the Operate pull down menu SELECT the NPRO Page pushbutton on Display Touch Screen window e Forms starting with the page at the transfer station of Printer 1 move through both printers to the next top of page position Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 77 Canceling a Job Do this task when you need to stop a print job and delete the print data Operate Configure Analyze Options Cancel Job j This procedure will cancel the current print job Select OK to cancel the current print job Select Close to exit this window without canceling the print job Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job 1 Stop the printers A2300112 Zt e In duplex mode you must stop both printers To do this SELECT the Stop pushbutton on the main Display Touch Screen window e With a simplex printer or a duplex
208. he following tasks require Customer Engineer authorization Service Actions Configure Control Unit Trace within Traces Initial Operation When the printers are shipped from the factory they are set for the Key Operator user authorization level which makes all procedures except service related activities available The factory set password is all blanks That is if you change the user level to the Operator level and then want to go back to the Key Operator level simply SELECT the OK pushbutton on the keyboard window when it appears without entering any data If you want to maintain a Key Operator authorization level IBM recommends that you establish a new password for the Key Operator when the installation is complete If you treat all operators as key operators then leave the current all blanks password as it is If you forget or lose the current Key Operator password the system accepts a fixed alternate password for that level Obtain this alternate password from your system administrator Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 79 To Change the Password or Authorization Level do the following 1 From the Options pull down menu SELECT Password Operate Configure Analyze Options Assign Form to Load Enable Disable Attachments Password Change Language Clean Screen Calibrate Touch Screen Front Face Special Features Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job J
209. hich the printer can produce print samples accept configuration changes and control traces When the InfoPrint 3000 are in test mode they is not accepting information from the attached controlling computer system Contrast with print mode and diagnostic mode text orientation The position of text as a combination of print direction and baseline direction tie The interval between cuts of a perforation token Ina local area network a particular message or bit pattern passed successively from one attaching device to another to indicate which attachment has permission to transmit token ring A network with a ring topology that passes tokens from one attaching device to another toner The material that forms the image on the paper trace 1 A record of the running of a computer program It exhibits the sequences in which the instructions were executed 2 To record a series of events as they occur 3 In the InfoPrint 3000 a customer engineer and customer analysis procedure tractor The mechanism that controls movement of continuous forms by way of holes tractor holes The holes in the side margins on continuous forms When placed on the tractor pins the holes maintain printer alignment and registration and control the movement of the paper Two channel switch TCS A hardware facility that allows an input or output device to be attached to two channels In a 3900 Advanced Function Printing System this facility i
210. his item unless two channels are installed Static or Dynamic 232 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Table 17 Parallel Channel Attachment Items continued Configuration Item Description Value Options Data Transfer Specifies the data transfer mode to be used DC Interlocked or Data Streaming Protocol Interlocked or Data Streaming If two channels are installed both channels use the same protocol Data Streaming Rate Specifies the data rate being used if you select the 1 9 MB sec Data Streaming Data Transfer Protocol Use the highest e 2 7 MB sec rate that is supported by your system e 3 4 MB sec If two channels are installed both channels use the same 45 MB sec data rate Card 1 Slot Position The printer sets this entry automatically at power on time 9 or 4 or Not Installed for if the system senses the presence of a Parallel Channel Model ES1 card This item is not selectable lt Gem or N t Installed for Models ED1 ED2 Card 2 Slot Position The printer sets this entry automatically at power on time 9 or 4 or Not Installed for if the system senses the presence of a Parallel Channel Model ES1 card This item is not selectable i6 or 8 of Not Installed or Models ED1 ED2 Chapter 8 Configuring the System 233 ESCON Channel Configuration Information able 19 lists all configuration items what each item is used for and the allowable
211. host PSF software and in the case of S 390 hosts the I O device definitions 00 to FF Hexadecimal notation Default is X 00 Multi host environment flag Shows whether a multiple host printer sharing system exists If this environment flag is set all hosts are required to use the assign unassign protocols of the attachment architecture Not supported on all printers True or False Card 1 Slot Position The printer sets this entry automatically at power on time if the system senses the presence of an ESCON Channel card This item is not selectable e 2 or 4 or Not Installed for Model ES1 e 6 or 8 or Not Installed for Models ED1 ED2 Card 2 Slot Position The printer sets this entry automatically at power on time if the system senses the presence of an ESCON Channel card This item is not selectable e 2 or 4 or Not Installed for Model ES1 6 or 8 or Not Installed for Models ED1 ED2 234 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Token Ring TCP IP Attachment Information lists all configuration items what each item is used for and the allowable value options for each item The factory set default values are underlined Table 19 Token Ring TCP IP Attachment Items Configuration Item Description Value Options Token Ring TCP IP Specifies if the Token Ring adapter is installed Yes or No Installed TCP Port Specifies the TCP socket address of the attachment 50
212. host system attachments e Safely prepare the system so that the AFCCU may be powered off Note You should always do this procedure before you switch off power to the AFCCU regardless of whether a recovery action procedure instructed you to switch power off to the system or you are doing it on your own Operate Configure Analyze Options Shutdown Restart You are about to close all of the printer s communications attachments and close all of the printer s active procedures Select Shutdown to shut down the printer Select Restart to shut down and restart the printer Select Cancel to exit this window without shutting down or restarting shutdown Restart Cancel Help Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job Shutting Down the System A2300114 Note With a duplex configuration in duplex mode or with a simplex printer this procedure shuts down the complete system both printers in a duplex configuration In dual simplex mode this procedure shuts down only the target printer The other printer remains active and usable If you are shutting down the last active dual simplex printer the complete system is shutdown Note that once you have shutdown a dual simplex printer using this procedure the only way to get it back to active use is to shutdown the other dual simplex printer also Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 61 1 From the Operate pull down me
213. hrough the printer This entry can be used when an uncoupled not functionally attached postprocessing device is installed and it is necessary to extend the NPRO length to be able to easily remove forms at the postprocessing device output If any installed and enabled preprocessing postprocessing devices have the Pre postprocessor Extended NPRO distance of an enabled pre postprocessor set to greater than zero then that distance will take precedence over the NPRO Length even if the NPRO Length is longer The Pre postprocessor Extended NPRO distance is set in the Configure Pre Post procedure If several Pre postprocessor Extended NPRO distances are set then the longest one takes precedence Auto NPRO at End This entry indicates whether an automatic NPRO is Yes or No of Forms performed when an End of Forms is detected Jam Recovery Point This entry sets a distance past the printer fuser sufficient Range of 0 to 500 inches Distance for forms to reach an installed postprocessing device so that those forms will be reprinted following a forms jam recovery In duplex mode this distance is measured past the fuser of Printer 2 In dual simplex mode it is a distance past either Printer 1 or Printer 2 A non zero value setting assumes that a postprocessing device is installed and enabled the Jam Recovery Type configuration item setting above allows reprinting of pages and the Direct
214. ht for 11 inches and the light for inch are on Note Forms that are greater than 14 inches long require postprocessing equipment 104 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide 6 0D099H 5 Release the transfer station latch and raise the transfer station to its upright position 8009099H 6 Swing the lower static discharge brush to the left 7 Pull the forms to the right of the static discharge brush up to the transfer station 105 Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 8 13 14 15 16 17 Pull the forms over the forms guides Zi HC60G060 Open the two lower tractor covers 10 ti 12 Guide the forms under the transfer station brushes and up to the tractor area Place the forms on the front tractor pins and close the tractor cover Slide the blue rear lever on the adjustable tractor assembly until the rear tractor is approximately the width of the forms Place the forms on the rear tractor pins and close the rear tractor cover Note Verify that the holes are aligned correctly Slide the rear blue lever on the adjustable tractor assembly until the forms are smooth and taut between the front and rear tractors Press down firmly on the blue lever to ensure the rear tractor assembly is locked in place Press and hold the Forms Feed button to feed approximately 1 3 meters 4 feet of forms enough to reach the tension arm Lower the trans
215. iated licensed programs Preface xxvii xxviii InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Summary of Changes The following list is a summary of the changes made in this edition Copyright IBM Corp 1998 Miscellaneous changes were made to Chapter 1 and Chapter 3 Miscellaneous changes were made to Chapter 6 The Description and Value Option for POE Boldness in Hable 25 on page 259 and were updated One of two forms identification worksheets in Chapter 8 was deleted Miscellaneous changes were made to Deletions were made in The Toner Yield Calculations appendix was deleted XXix XXX InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Chapter 1 Introduction M Chapter Overview This chapter reviews the characteristics of the IBM InfoPrint 3000 including the following models ESI e ED1 ED2 System Characteristics summarizes the specifications for the various printers in the InfoPrint 3000 family Copyright IBM Corp 1998 T apiny s 10ze1 dO 000E PNAOJU Table 1 InfoPrint 3000 Printer Specification Summary Basis Paper Weights Forms Width Forms Length Model Mode Resolution Print Speed vi DPI IPM g m Ibs a Max mm in Min mm in Max mm in 480 600 3 76 2 0 3 3 0 356 0 3 14 0 ES1 Simplex 480 6002 112 172 60 160 16 42 204 8 457 18 0 013 0 013 p 480 600 R ee Duplex 480 600 224 344 607105 ies 22
216. ible for payment of any taxes including personal property taxes resulting from this authorization THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties so the above exclusion may not apply to you Your failure to comply with the terms above terminates this authorization Upon termination you must destroy your machine readable documentation Copyright IBM Corp 1998 xvii Trademarks The following terms used in this publication are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries or both AFCCU and Advanced Function Common Control Unit AFP and Advanced Function Presentation Advanced Function Printing AIX AIX 6000 BCOCA and Bar Code Object Content Architecture ESCON GDDM IBM InfoPrint IPDS and Intelligent Printer Data Stream MVS and MVS SP OS 2 PSF and Print Services Facility PSF 6000 390 System 360 System 370 XGA Communication Statements Federal Communications Commission FCC Statement Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate r
217. ice is installed and enabled which disables the stacker mechanism Recovery Actions e 10 11 Visually check to see if a forms jam is actually present Open the stacker gate If you do not find a jam clean the stacker jam sensors See step ba page ad under Cleaning the Printed Go to step B If you do find a jam clear forms from the aa ES Note When you remove the forms from the stacker leave 4 to 5 pages attached to the end of the job running in the stacker to ensure correct forms folding when printing resumes Close the stacker gate If either stacker jam message is still displayed SELECT the Check Reset pushbutton on the Printer Error Display Touch Screen window Check for and resolve or postpone any other error or intervention message appearing on the Display Touch Screen window Ensure that the Forms Set indicator on the printer control panel displays the same fold direction as the fold on the lower tractors If necessary enter the Thread Align Forms procedure see a SELECT the Feed Forms pushbutton twice this provides enough forms beyond Printer 1 to load Printer 2 b Complete the Thread Align Forms procedure by adding enough forms beyond Printer 2 to splice on the floor between Printer 2 and a postprocessing device forms just loaded on Printer 2 to the forms remaining threaded in a postprocessing device c Do all the steps in 2 on both Printer 1 and Printer 2 SEL
218. ighlighted by reversing the color of the character with its background for example changing a black character on a white background to a white character on a black background RPQ Request for price quotation S SBCS Single byte character set scanner A device that examines OCR graphics MICR or bar code patterns and generates electrical signals corresponding to the pattern It sends the signals to a computing device for processing screen or screening In document printing a sheet of material usually film carrying a regular pattern of small dots When printing ink adheres only to the dots and many dots close together appear solid This method prints large areas of ink on paper but uses much less ink than printing the same area with solid ink SCSW Subchannel status word SDLC Synchronous Data Link Control security paper Specially formulated paper used for negotiable documents such as checks which improves the anti fraud characteristics of the document shift A scheduled work period For example a 24 hour day is often divided into three 8 hour shifts simplex printing Pertaining to printing on only one side of a form Contrast with duplex printing single byte character set SBCS A character set in which each character is represented by a 1 byte code sizing A process where paper is treated to give it resistance against penetration of liquids SMM Select Medium Modification SNA System Network Ar
219. ign forms 152 forms broken between printers 162 forms loaded through both printers 154 forms not loaded in printer 2 158 print while threading 156 160 165 threading without printing 155 158 threading buffer flipper unit 167 timeout screen saver 40 token ring attachment configuration 235 toner 177 adding 182 cartridge 21 changing collector 188 check collector 186 collector changing 188 location of 32 install one toner cartridge 182 toner continued supply pushbutton 20 toner inlet 20 toner supply low 182 toner collector 177 traces 148 traces running 148 tractor control lever 25 transfer station area 22 cleaning 88 control lever 22 25 tractor control lever 25 triangle symbol 41 U Unit Emergency switch 18 56 unload the stacker 169 usage card 146 V vacuum cleaner 176 vacuum cleaner toner certified 88 vertical print position 73 vertical scroll bar 38 visual cues 41 voids print 267 W warning symbol console 41 watch symbol 41 white streaks 267 wide characters 266 window keyboard keypad window symbol 41 more windows symbol 41 symbols and visual cues 41 worksheet supplies 176 Index 309 310 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Readers Comments We d Like to Hear from You InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Publication No S544 5564 01 Overall how satisfied are you with the information in this book Very Satisfied Satisfied Neutral Overall satisfaction Ol
220. ii xviii XX XX xxi xxii XXV XXV XXV XXV XXV XXV XXVvii XXVvii XX X ANoOaARWwW e Power Control Panel Developer Area Forms Input and Transfer Station Area Printer Control Panel Transfer Station Control Lever and Tractor Control Levers Puller Control Lever Fuser Entry Area Stacker Area Stacker Control Panel Forms Length and Width Controls Stacker Height Control Rear Service Area Chapter 4 Using the epee Touch Screen Using the Display Touch Screen in Duplex and Dual Simplex Modes oe E Display Touch Screen Windows Keyboard Keypad and Hexpad Windows Selection Devices on the Display Touch Screen Windows 2 Fingertip Control Pushbuttons Selectable Field Radio Buttons Scroll Bar Inactive Items Control Procedures System Menu Multiple Procedures Screen Saver Timeout Symbols and Visual Cues Chapter 5 Task Summary Operate Pull Down Menu Configure Pull Down Menu Analyze Pull Down Menu Options Pull Down Menu Help Pull Down Menu Additional Help Chapter 6 Operator eee eee Controlling the System Power Local Remote Power Control Powering On the System Powering Off the System Shutting Down and Restarting the System Shutting Down the System a Se Restarting the System Enabling and Disabling Attachments Remote Channel Enable Disable Local Channel Enable Disable Adjusting the Display Touch Screen Monitor User Con
221. iled A402 Token Ring TCP IP Wrap test failed A403 Ethernet TCP IP Ethernet timeout A404 Ethernet TCP IP Basic test failed A405 Ethernet TCP IP Wrap test failed A406 Ethernet TCP IP 10Base2 failed A407 Ethernet TCP IP 10BaseT failed A40D FDDI TCP IP FDDI timeout A40E FDDI Basic test failed A40F FDDI Wrap test failed A410 Ethernet TCP IP Diagnostic hardware setting mismatch A440 TCP IP PSF protocol error A441 TCP IP ASA protocol error A442 TCP IP Internal error A450 Ethernet TCP IP Local software error A451 Ethernet TCP IP Remote software error A452 Ethernet TCP IP Network software error A453 Ethernet TCP IP Unknown software error A454 Ethernet TCP IP Local hardware error A455 Ethernet TCP IP Remote hardware error A456 Ethernet TCP IP Network Hardware error A457 Ethernet TCP IP Unknown hardware error A458 Ethernet TCP IP Unknown local error Chapter 10 Responding to Messages 285 Table 30 SRC Messages continued Code Message Text Type Printer Error unless noted otherwise A459 Ethernet TCP IP Unknown remote error A45A Ethernet TCP IP Unknown network error A45B Ethernet TCP IP Unknown error A45C Ethernet TCP IP Invalid configuration during enable A45D Ethernet TCP IP Invalid configuration during run A460 Token Ring TCP IP Local software error A461 Token Ring
222. in Printer 2 of a duplex configuration or Printer Utility Module PUM Frame in Printer 1 5 Printer Engine Frame Chapter 3 Functional Areas 17 Operator Alert Area The following figure shows the controls on the Operator Alert Area which is on the base of the Operator Alert Assembly Using This Control Does This Operator Alert Adjusts the volume of the operator alert assembly Assembly Volume Control O O A10M0140 External Connections Provides customers with a set of external contacts to allow the for Customers hook up of an alert signal of the customer s choice la SY RZ DVA Display Touch Screen A10M0141 The Display Touch Screen provides you with a touch sensitive interface to the printer describes it in detail Power Control Panel On Printer 1 of a duplex system the Power Control Panel provides power control for the Printer Utility Module PUM frame and the printer engine On Printer 2 of a duplex system and on a simplex printer the Power Control Panel provides direct power control for the AFCCU frame and the printer engine The Power Control Panel also provides remote power control for Printer 1 in a duplex printing system Control Remote Uni Power Power Off Unit nit Power L Local On If In Local Emergency Power Enable Printer SU Power Power Off Power Local On If In Local O Power Off
223. ining to a set of paper sizes selected from those standardized by the International Organization for Standardization ISO for use in data processing J jam Ina printer a condition where forms have become blocked or wedged in the forms path so the printer cannot operate JES2 An MVS subsystem that receives jobs into the system converts them to internal format selects them for running processes their output and purges them from the system In an installation with more than one processor each JES2 processor independently controls its job input scheduling and output processing JES3 An MVS subsystem that receives jobs into the system converts them to internal format selects them for running processes their output and purges them from the system In complexes that have several loosely coupled processing units the JES3 program manages processors so that the global processor exercises centralized control over the local processors and distributes jobs to them via a common job queue K KB Kilobyte IKB 1 024 bytes L LAN Local area network landscape orientation Text and images that are printed parallel to the longer side of the forms laser light amplification by stimulated emission of radiation A device that emits a beam of coherent light latent image In a printer the invisible image that exists in the sensitized material after exposure but before development layout plan A list of requirements su
224. ion Do not switch power off to the printer during this procedure Using the wrong toner can cause serious print quality problems this can force a service call See able 15 on page 177 for the correct cartridge part number Do this task when you see this message 1 TONER 0786 lt 7 You need the following items when you add toner e One cartridge of toner e Cloth or paper towels To add toner do the following 1 Open the front right cover of the printer Operator Tips e Working with toner can be messy You may want to spread papers on the floor under the developer inlet to catch spills e If you get toner on your hands gently brush or blow it off and avoid touching your eyes or mouth e If you get toner on your clothes gently brush or blow it off If that does not remove all of the toner wash the clothes with cold water Hot water or hot process dry cleaning will fuse the toner to the fabric 182 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide gt ee 2 Open a new toner carton Remove the carton lid the new toner ne and the cardboard tray Save the carton lid for later use in step HC60G009 3 Set the new toner cartridge aside 4 Tap the cartridge to loosen any toner still in the cartridge HC60G029 5 Open the latch 1 in front of the toner cartridge Chapter 7 Ordering and Replacing Supplies 183 HC60G010 6 Line up the cardboard tray against
225. ion is set to 480 DPI The maximum adjustment in any direction from this position is about 6 inches Note The InfoPrint 3000 printers show a range of either 2880 for 480 DPI or 3600 for 600 DPI What If the Adjustment Required Is Out of Range If more than 20 mm adjustment from 0 is required refer the application owner to the Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers The vertical and horizontal adjustment directions are always relative to the process direction the direction that forms are moving through the printer The vertical adjustment moves the point of origin on a line parallel to the forms Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 71 tractor feed holes the process direction The horizontal adjustment moves the point of origin on a line that is at 90 perpendicular to the forms tractor feed holes See Figure 21 on page 71 Be aware that the printed output can be rotated when printed Imagine that your sample page shows that the text is printing too high and too far to the left in relation to the preprinted form To correct this situation increase the vertical_ and horizontal positions to move the point of origin down and to the right shows the result of changing the vertical position to 7 and the horizontal position to 6 The figure is not drawn to scale V 480 A z Ols 5 6 L a H 480 tins oe 1111 480 A ea 7 fa y Ole ig Aare j A HO V 7 O 48
226. ional image compression algorithm Also referred to as CCITT Group 3 Multiple Virtual Storage System Product MVS SP Consisting of MVS System Product Version 1 and the MVS 370 Data Facility Product operating on a System 370 processor N nonimpact printer A printer in which printing is not the result of mechanical impacts Contrast with impact printer nonprocess runout NPRO An operation that moves forms through the forms path without printing O OCR Optical character recognition offset paper A grade of paper to which sizing is added to resist moisture and surface during printing by ink presses OGL Overlay Generation Language operating environment The physical environment for example temperature humidity layout or power requirements operating requirements A list of requirements such as environmental electrical and space that must be satisfied before the IBM InfoPrint 3000 can be installed Operating System Virtual Storage OS VS A compatible extension of the IBM System 360 Operating System that supports hardware and the extended control facilities of System 370 optical character recognition OCR Character recognition that uses optical means to identify graphic characters orientation The number of degrees an object is rotated relative to a reference for example the Glossary 301 orientation of an overlay relative to the page point of origin See also text orientation OS VS o
227. is also printed on the alignment page The bar shows whether Side 1 or Side 2 of the form is being printed on Printer 1 This prints a dashed alignment mark after the leading edge of the page Feeds a fixed length of forms through Printer 1 This is either the length set in the Form Feed Length printer configuration item if you select the Feed Forms pushbutton or the length of one page according the page length definition for the Form Name currently loaded if you select the Printer 1 Feed Page pushbutton Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 163 After you have completed the splicing procedure go to step zl 5 SELECT the Forms are Connected pushbutton 6 SELECT the Feed to Align pushbutton on the Thread Align Forms window 7 Visually verify that the dashed alignment mark that is printed on Printer 1 is aligned to the alignment mark on the input station on Printer 2 a Ifthe alignment mark is aligned at Printer 2 check to see if there is a sufficient buffer loop of forms between Printer 1 and the Buffer Flipper Unit If you need to increase the buffer loop change the Length of Forms Between Transfer Points printer configuration item See the table item on page for more information b If the Printer 1 alignment mark is short of the alignment mark in Printer 2 SELECT the Printer 2 Feed Page pushbutton on the window as many times as necessary until the Printer 1 alignment mark is aligned at Printer 2 c Ifthe Printer 1 alignment
228. is from the area 35 Close the front left cover REAR SERVICE AREA e HC60G046 36 Open the rear center and right covers of the printer Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 99 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 i HC60G031 Remove the Toner Collector Case Vacuum any spilled toner from around and under the Toner Collector Case Use a soft cloth to clean the inside cover surfaces in the rear service area Vacuum any paper dust chads and other debris from the fuser oil reservoir area Close all covers securely Use a soft cloth that is moistened with water to clean the covers and panels m Important Note About Cleaners Do not use commercial cleaners that might contain ammonia solvents or other volatile chemicals The vapors from these cleaners can cause chemical reactions that result in reduced print quality This step is not required if you did not unload forms before starting this procedure Enable the host_attachments if necessary See for details 100 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Connecting an Accessory to the Operator Alert Contacts HC60G053 This function provides you with a set of external contacts th
229. lay Touch Screen window e If you are printing in simplex or dual simplex mode SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the main Display Touch Screen window for one or both printers Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 59 Powering Off the System For duplex systems operating in duplex mode and for simplex systems you must switch power off to the complete system whenever you want to switch power off to any single element However for duplex systems operating in dual simplex mode you do not have to switch power off to the complete system to power off any single element In Host Controlled Remote Mode 1 On the Display Touch Screen from the Operate pull down menu SELECT the Shutdown Restart procedure 2 On the Shutdown Restart window SELECT the Shutdown pushbutton In dual simplex mode on the Shutdown Restart window SELECT the Shutdown pushbutton for the other printer if desired Wait for a Shutdown Complete message to appear on the Display Touch Screen In dual simplex mode this message appears only if both printers are shutdown 3 Inform the host system console operator that you want to switch power off to the system 4 The host console operator will inform you when both printers have been switched offline at the host 5 The host system console operator switches power off to the system remotely In Local Controlled Mode 1 On the Display Touch Screen from the Operate pull down menu SELECT the Shutdown Restart procedure 2
230. lel Channel Installed ESCON Channel Installed Lv Configure View OK Cancel Help Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job A2300084 4 To view configuration information for an attachment do the following a SELECT an attachment type from the list b SELECT the View pushbutton You see the View Configuration window 5 To print a copy of the configuration information for an attachment do the following a SELECT an attachment type from the list b SELECT the View or Configure pushbutton c On the resulting window SELECT the Print pushbutton You see the Print Configuration window d To change the number of copies you print do the following 1 SELECT the How Many field 2 Type the number of copies you want to print 3 SELECT the OK pushbutton e SELECT the Print pushbutton on the Print Configuration window Important The configuration data is always printed in U S English 6 To change configuration information for an attachment do the following a b Cc SELECT an attachment type SELECT the Configure pushbutton You see a list of configuration items for the attachment To change an item 1 SELECT it from the list You see either a pop up window or a keypad window 2 SELECT the value you want from the pop up window or enter data on the keypad window Then SELECT the OK pushbutton
231. llowable value options for each item The factory set default values are underlined Table 20 Ethernet TCP IP Attachment Items Configuration Item Description Value Options Ethernet TCP IP Specifies if the Ethernet adapter is installed Yes or No Installed TCP Port Specifies the TCP socket address of the attachment 5001 to 65536 Notes 1 Only one address is required for operating a simplex system 2 If your installation runs in dual simplex and duplex mode specify the same TCP Port value for duplex mode as you do for Printer 1 in dual simplex mode IBM recommends using the default value of 5001 Also make sure you specify a unique value for Printer 2 in simplex mode Printer 1 and Printer 2 cannot use the same value If you use the default value of 5001 for Printer 1 IBM recommends using 5002 as the value for Printer 2 3 The TCP Port numbers specified in the printer configuration must match the PORT numbers assigned in the host PSF system 4 Because Printer 1 in a dual simplex system and the complete system in duplex system share a common port number operational procedures must be defined to distinguish between duplex and dual simplex printing The easiest way to manage this is to assign separate queues for duplex versus dual simplex output for PSF 2 and PSF 6000 and to assign at least a unique job class for duplex jobs for S 390 host PSF systems IP Address Specifies the Internet Protocol IP a
232. loading boxed continuous forms that are loaded at the forms input area of Printer 1 through the Buffer Flipper Unit Urge Unit and Printer 2 to the output stacker of Printer 2 If preprocessing or postprocessing devices are used with the printing system steps involving the continuous forms source and the final destination are different from the instructions given here Because each preprocessing and postprocessing device is unique you should use the specific instructions for the initial loading from a preprocessing device to Printer 1 or forms handling in a postprocessing device following Printer 2 that accompany the preprocessing or postprocessing device Do this task when any of the following situations occur e You see the END OF FORMS 078A message e You need to change forms e You are prompted by a forms jam recovery procedure step Printer 2 Printer 1 HC60G027 CAUTION lt 72 gt As you load forms be careful to avoid injuries The tractor covers are spring loaded and can pinch if they snap shut unexpectedly Moving forms especially between the transfer station and the fuser entry area can cause severe paper cuts CAUT0102 To load forms do the following 1 Ensure that both Printer 1 and Printer 2 are in the Not Ready state before you begin this task 2 Ensure that the Urge Unit is not running Chapter 6 Operator Respo
233. lso if a postprocessing device is used an extra number of pages can be added to the normal number of reprinted pages Do this by setting the Jam Recovery Point Distance configuration item under the Configure Printer procedure to a non zero value This extra number of pages is the physically configured distance from_the top of the stacker in Printer 2 to or through the postprocessing device shows the normal reprint path length from the transfer station 3 in Printer 1 to the stacker in Printer 2 7 It also shows the additional Jam Recovery Point Distance from the stacker in Printer 2 7 to or through the postprocessing device 6 Printer 2 Printer 1 H H HC60G027 Figure 26 Duplex Mode Reprint Path Length Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 127 Following the automatic reprinting of pages you must check for and discard any duplicate pages that may have been printed Locate the first reprinted page then find that same page in the stacker or a postprocessing device Discard all pages starting with that page In all cases but one the automatic reprinting of pages recovers all pages that might have been lost or damaged as the result of the jam The exception occurs when a FUSER WRAP 0134 jam type is detected A jam of this type can backup accordion pleat the forms until the error is detected and the forward m
234. m because someone has pressed the Stop key on the Printer 1 Stacker Control Panel The printer can be made ready only by pressing the Ready key on the Printer 1 Stacker Control Panel not by SELECTING the Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen This message is not displayed in simplex mode NOT READY AT PRINTER 2 In duplex mode the system is not ready to accept print jobs from the host system because someone has pressed the Stop key on the Printer 2 Stacker Control Panel The printer can be made ready only by pressing the Ready key on the Printer 2 Stacker Control Panel not by SELECTING the Ready pushbutton for Printer 2 on the Display Touch Screen This message is not displayed in simplex mode NOT READY AT PRINTER Dual This message is displayed for duplex systems in dual simplex mode and for simplex Simplex and Simplex printers The message indicates that someone has pressed the Stop key on the printer Stacker Control Panel The printer can be made ready only by pressing the Ready key on the printer Stacker Control Panel not by SELECTING the Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen NOT READY AT PRINTER Someone has pressed the Stop key on the printer Stacker Control Panel The printer Simplex can be made ready only by pressing the Ready key on the printer Stacker Control Panel not by SELECTING the Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen RECEIVING In duplex mode the system is receiving print job data
235. mark is past the alignment mark in printer 2 first add some more buffer loop between Printer 1 and the Buffer Flipper Unit by SELECTING the Printer 1 Feed Page pushbutton several times Then SELECT the Cancel pushbutton on the window You must now restart this Thread Align Forms procedure 8 After you have visually verified that the Printer 1 alignment mark is aligned correctly on Printer 2 SELECT the Mark is Aligned pushbutton on the window At the Verification window SELECT the OK pushbutton This informs the control unit that the alignment is complete m Important If your visual verification of alignment is incorrect all following duplex print jobs are printed with incorrect alignment between the front and back of the pages 9 If a postprocessing device is installed and not threaded SELECT the Feed Forms pushbutton on the window as many times as necessary to advance the forms enough to thread the postprocessing device 10 SELECT the Completed pushbutton on the window that removes this window This completes this type of Thread Align Forms procedure 11 To begin printing SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the main Display Touch Screen window 164 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Operate Configure Analyze Options Thread Align Forms Print While Threading aoe Printer 1 Select No or Yes in the Print While No Feed Page Threading Field Printer 2 Select Start to
236. mark on the input station on Printer 2 a If the alignment mark is aligned at Printer 2 check to see if there is a sufficient buffer loop of forms between Printer 1 and the Buffer Flipper Unit If you need to increase the buffer loop change the Length of Forms Between Transfer Points printer configuration item See the table item on page 623 for more information b If the Printer 1 alignment mark is short of the alignment mark in Printer 2 SELECT the Printer 2 Feed Page pushbutton on the window as many times as necessary until the Printer 1 alignment mark is aligned at Printer 2 c If the Printer 1 alignment mark is past the alignment mark on printer 2 first add some more buffer loop between Printer 1 and the Buffer Flipper Unit by SELECTING the Printer 1 Feed Page pushbutton several times Then SELECT the Cancel pushbutton on the window You must now restart this Thread Align Forms procedure 9 After you have visually verified that the Printer 1 alignment mark is aligned correctly on Printer 2 SELECT the Mark is Aligned pushbutton on the window At the Verification window SELECT the OK pushbutton This informs the control unit that the alignment is complete Important If your visual verification of alignment is incorrect all following duplex print jobs are printed with incorrect alignment between the front and back of the pages 10 If a postprocessing device is installed and not threaded SELECT the Feed F
237. mber operational procedures must be defined to distinguish between duplex and dual simplex printing The easiest way to manage this is to assign separate queues for duplex versus dual simplex output for PSF 2 and PSF 6000 and to assign at least a unique job class for duplex jobs for S 390 host PSF systems IP Address Specifies the Internet protocol IP address of the printer X X X X where X lt 255 in dotted decimal format Get this value from your LAN administrator This value must match the IP address value in the host PSF configuration This value is unique to a duplex system and is the same regardless of whether the printer is in duplex or dual simplex mode Subnet Mask Specifies the mask that identifies the local subnet in X X X X where X lt 255 dotted decimal format Get this value from your LAN administrator If you do not have a local subnet leave this field blank Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway in dotted X X X X where X lt 255 Address decimal format Get this value from your LAN administrator MTU Size Specifies the Maximum Transmission Unit MTU 256 to 4352 maximum allowable length of IP packets Hardware address Specifies the FDDI adapter ROM address This address cannot be changed Chapter 8 Configuring the System 239 Table 21 FDDI TCP IP Attachment Items continued Configuration Item Description Value Options Alternate addre
238. mperature 028D Thermistor 1 under temperature 028E Thermistor 2 under temperature 028F Thermistor 3 under temperature 0291 Hot roll overtemperature 0294 Hot roll overcurrent 0295 Hot roll lamp never turns on 0296 Hot roll lamp 1 relay always off 0297 Hot roll lamp 1 filament open 0298 Hot roll lamp 2 relay always off 0299 Hot roll lamp 2 filament open 029C Hot roll lamp 3 filament open 029D Hot roll lamp 3 relay always off 029E Hot roll lamp 4 filament open 029F Hot roll lamp 4 relay always off 0330 0339 Display Touch Screen error 0511 Printer unexpectedly went into diagnostic mode or dropped power 0521 Form length fuse 0522 Laser driver fuse 0523 PR sensor 0524 Fuser sensors fuse 0525 ST sensor fuse 0611 0666 Printer interface error 0783 Transfer station open Intervention Required 0785 Change toner collector Out of Supplies 0786 Add toner Out of Supplies 0787 Check toner collector Intervention Required 0788 Change developer mix Out of Supplies 0789 Developer drain open Intervention Required 078A End of Forms Intervention Required 078B Developer running Intervention Required 0791 Change fine filter Out of Supplies 0792 Add fuser oil Out of Supplies 0793 Change oiler belt Out of Supplies 0794 Oiler gate open Intervention Required Chapter 10 Responding to Messages 283 Table 30 SRC Messages continued Code Message
239. n SELECT the Cancel pushbutton on the window You must now restart this Thread Align Forms procedure After you visually verify that the Printer 1 alignment mark is aligned correctly on Printer 2 SELECT the Mark is Aligned pushbutton on the window At the Verification window SELECT the OK pushbutton This informs the control unit that the alignment is complete Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 157 Important If your visual verification of alignment is incorrect all following duplex print jobs are printed with incorrect alignment between the front and back of the pages 8 If a postprocessing device is installed and not threaded SELECT the Feed Forms pushbutton on the window as many times as necessary to advance the forms enough to thread the postprocessing device Printer 2 prints Side 2 pages starting on the page following the alignment page during these forms forward movements If the queued job is long enough Printer 1 continues printing Side 1 pages 9 SELECT the Completed pushbutton on the window This completes this type of Thread Align Forms procedure 10 To resume printing the queued job SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the main Display Touch Screen window Forms Are Not Loaded In Printer 2 These procedures assume the following e You have visually checked that forms have been threaded in Printer 1 and forms are not loaded in Printer 2 e The main Thread Align Forms procedure window appears on the
240. n on the Display Touch Screen window for the affected printer If reprinting is allowed all unfused pages between the transfer station and the top of the stacker plus any jam recovery point distance defined in the printer configuration are reprinted Check for and discard duplicate pages If the jam was the result of a FUSER WRAP 0134 all lost or damaged pages may not be reprinted Work with the host system console operator to recover these pages If reprinting is not allowed work with the host system console operator to recover the lost pages Se 44 if the error recurs frequently Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 123 Table 12 Jam Recovery Procedures Simplex Mode continued Error Message SRC Code In Numeric Order UPPER TRACTOR FORMS JAM 0119 TENSION ARM DOWN 0131 TENSION ARM UP 0132 SKEW ERROR 0133 FUSER WRAP 0134 Forms are NOT jammed torn or separated Recovery Actions If you do not find a forms jam do the following a Be aware that dark colored backing on the forms can cause the printer to display these messages b The message UPPER TRACTOR FORMS JAM 0119 may appear if the printer engine top cover is open and allowing light to affect an optical sensor Ensure that the top cover is closed c Clean the upper tractor jam sensor See step Open the upper tractor covers and ensure that the tractor holes align with the tractor pins Hold down the tension arm while
241. n the printer to Ready status m Operator Tips e Developer mix is slippery and working with it can be messy You may want to spread papers on the floor under the developer drain hose and under the developer mix inlet to catch spills e If you get developer mix on your hands wipe it off as soon as possible You need the following items when you change the developer mix e Developer mix e An empty developer mix bottle e Soft cloth or paper towels Chapter 7 Ordering and Replacing Supplies 191 HC60G030 1 Open the front center left and right covers and the top left cover 2 Clear the forms if possible from the forms input area If you cannot remove the forms from the input area do the following e If you are using boxed fan fold forms slide the box of forms as far to the left stacker end of the printer of the forms input area as possible e If you are using a preprocessing device supplying forms under the printer up into the forms input area create enough slack in the forms supply so that you can move the forms to the far left side of the forms input area Spread paper towels on top of the forms and on the floor of the forms input area 3 Remove the empty developer mix bottle from its storage slot at the right of the forms input area 192 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide HC60G036 4 Remove the cap from the empty bottle Put the bottle back in the slot directly under the develope
242. nel and some are available on the Display Touch Screen window 1 If you need to stop the printer SELECT the Stop pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen window 2 If you need to remove all the current forms from the forms path separate the forms at a perforation below the transfer station Ensure that the end of forms sensors are uncovered Open the static brush so the forms fall back into the box or input area 3 If you need to move forms to the stacker SELECT the NPRO pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen window If END OF FORMS appears repeat this step again Table Forms Feed gt Up Forward re fol STOP READY Down Stop Forms Select DA 16 22 Ibs 51 71kg 60 82g B 23 42 Ibs 72 135kg 83 157g OC Plastic Forms Length it 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 o E o ES ti j 1 3 1 2 2 3 ol HC6OG026 4 On the stacker control panel press the stacker table Down switch and wait for the stacker table to stop moving Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 169 170 HC60G068 5 Open the stacker gate 1 6 If you did not do an NPRO leave four to five pages of blank forms attached to the end of the job This ensures correct folding when you resume printing CAUTION lt 74 gt The weight of the paper in the stacker can be very heavy InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide CAUT0104 m Operator Tips on Removing
243. ng e In duplex or simplex mode SELECT the Configure pull down menu on the main Display Touch Screen window You can work with all configured preprocessing and postprocessing devices e In dual simplex mode SELECT the Configure pull down menu on the Display Touch Screen window of the printer with which you want to work You can work with only the preprocessing and postprocessing devices that are configured for that printer 2 SELECT the Configure Pre postprocessors procedure You see the Configure Pre postprocessors window which lists the device interfaces that are currently defined and installed Chapter 8 Configuring the System 241 Operate Configure Analyze Options Configure Pre Postprocessors Select a Processor Name Printer Port Enabled Pre Postprocessor Type Device 1 A E Vv F v ioy Pcoupied Postprocessor 7 Roll Feed Pre Postprocessor Characteristics Pre postprocessor extended NPRO 150 Pre postprocessor busy timer 300 Postprocessor tag type Coupled V Vv New Processor Delete Cancel Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job A2300085 Figure 35 Configure Pre Postprocessors Window Duplex Mode 3 To add a new interface do the following a b C d SELECT the New Processor pushbutton Use the keyboard to enter the name of the
244. nsibilities 115 116 You now have forms in the stacker of Printer 1 Use the Forms Feed pushbutton on the Stacker Control Panel as necessary to advance enough forms to thread the Buffer Flipper Unit the Urge Unit and Printer 2 h the Buffer Flipper Unit 2 see Threading thel Thread the forms throug Bring the forms under the control unit of Printer 2 to the Urge Unit 9 Thread the Urge Unit Ensure that the paper in Printer 1 is aligned with the forms scale on the rear tractor cover Go to the Thread to Align menu to ensure proper alignment See InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Adjusting the Stacker Table Height When you change forms on the printer it may be necessary to change the height of the stacker table For example going from very narrow to very wide forms could make it necessary to shorten the height of the output stack and thus reduce the weight of the stack you have to unload Raising the height of the stacker table reduces the height and weight of the output stack that causes the STACKER FULL message to appear on the Display Touch Screen The shorter height of the output stack means you have to unload the stacker more often but a short output stack weighs less than a taller stack Conversely lowering the stacker table increases the height of the output stack and the STACKER FULL message appears on the Display Touch Screen less often HC60G077
245. nt 3000 Operator s Guide Increases or decreases the stacker length setting You can set the forms length from 7 to 14 inches The length increases or decreases in increments of one third and one half inch You turn the knob clockwise to increase the forms length You turn the knob counterclockwise to decrease the forms length The length you set with the FORMS LENGTH knob is indicated by the LEDs on the Stacker Control Panel Stacker Height Control The stacker height control is behind the front left cover This control allows you to control the height and weight of the printed output stack Raising the stacker height shortens the height of the output stack While this reduces the weight of the output stack it also required you to empty the stacker more often For more information on using this control see Note Use this control only for fan fold forms not for roll feed forms a HC60G077 Figure 3 Stacker Height Control Chapter 3 Functional Areas 31 Rear Service Area The toner collector fine filter usage meter and fuser oil reservoir are in the rear service area The preprocessing postprocessing device interface cable connection area is located behind the rear cover of either the AFCCU frame or the PUM frame Note that the preprocessing postprocessing device interface cable connection area is the same on the AFCCU frame of the following e A simplex printer e Printer
246. nter Utility Module PUM attached to Printer 1 Printer 1 Optional preprocessing device for Printer 2 Optional postprocessing device for Printer 1 AFCCU attached to Printer 2 Printer 2 Optional postprocessing device for Printer 2 Chapter 2 Operator s Overview Chapter Overview This chapter provides an overview of the operator tasks and the general operation of the printer Operator Responsibilities able J summarizes the responsibilities of the operator Table 2 Operator Responsibilities What to Do When to Do It Where to Find More Information Power on off the printer and enable disable attachments As necessary Clean all functional areas of the printer Once per day e Before and after printing adhesive labels Define and load forms As necessary Thread forms duplex mode ensure proper form alignment and verify side 2 printing When loading new forms after a power on or restart and after any machine detected errors Change mode from duplex to dual simplex or dual simplex to duplex As necessary Empty stacker As necessary Check print quality and print samples e At the start of every shift e Before and during any important jobs Adjust the print position As necessary Replenish and check supplies Copyright IBM Corp 1998 As indicated by messages on the Display Touch Screen of the affected printer
247. nters is inoperable the remaining printer can run independently so long as power and connection to the control unit are maintained Alternatively forms can remain threaded continuously through both printers in a duplex physical configuration but with printing occurring in simplex mode Printing occurs on only one printer while the other printer processes blank pages Note Each printer can have its own set of preprocessing and postprocessing devices Both printers in the configuration attach to a host system through the AFCCU The AFCCU controls both printers independently and is physically attached to Printer 2 in the configuration Chapter 1 Introduction 5 Inline Configuration for Duplex 6 N GS UU fF WO N me InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide HC610010 Optional preprocessing device Printer Utility Module PUM attached to Printer 1 Printer 1 Buffer Flipper Unit AFCCU attached to Printer 2 Printer 2 Optional postprocessing device Left Angle Configuration for Duplex N FS Ua A WO N m HC610008 Optional preprocessing device Printer Utility Module PUM attached to Printer 1 Printer 1 Buffer Flipper Unit AFCCU attached to Printer 2 Printer 2 Optional postprocessing device Chapter 1 Introduction 7 Left Angle Configuration for Dual Simplex 8 on A VT A WOW N me InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide A HC610009 Optional preprocessing device for Printer 1 Pri
248. nting from PSF MVS on a System 370 channel or an ESCON channel this is because of the frequent IPDS acknowledgment rate Set to High if printing pages with large amounts of data such as large images This parameter is used to allocate space for ready to print pages including pages between the transfer points of a continuous forms duplex printer Set the value to Low if these conditions are met e The pages contain little data e This is a simplex printer e This is a duplex printer with a distance between transfer points of less than 400 inches Set the value to High if these conditions are met e The pages contain large amounts of data especially shaded areas e This is a duplex printer with a distance between transfer points of over 400 inches Low Medium or High Low Medium or High Direct Attach This entry shows if printing is to occur in direct printing mode when connected to an MVS or OS 390 operating system with no host assisted recovery procedures such as retransmission of pages after a forms jam The host system programmer will inform you whether this entry should be set to Yes Yes or No 222 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Table 16 Printer Configuration Items continued Configuration Item Description Value Options NPRO Length This entry sets an extra length that is added to the fixed Range of 0 to 1200 inches NPRO length to create a total distance that forms are moved t
249. nts in your area Customers should consult local disposal regulations if they elect not to use the return procedure offered by IBM XxiV InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide SAFEOOEI Preface This publication is for the InfoPrint 3000 Type 3300 Model ES1 and InfoPrint 3000 Models ED1 ED2 Advanced Function Printers You will find the terms InfoPrint 3000 Model ES1 and Models ED1 ED2 used throughout this document This publication explains how to operate and maintain the InfoPrint 3000 printers including the following models ESI e ED1 ED2 About This Book This publication contains the following sections a describes the parts of the printer including its switches conirols and Display Touch Screens 2 j contains step by step instructions for dene and replacing supplies for the aia step by step instructions for configuring ine printer the host attachments and the pre processing and post processing device interfaces the chapter also describes how to define forms for the printer aiamaa about solving common problems that aa occur during printer operation messages and codes you may see on the printer Display Touch Screen and on the Display Touch Screen windows defines terms used in the InfoPrint 3000 library How to Use This Book Depending on your level of knowledge about the printers you may need to use some chapters more than others e New Operators If you have little experien
250. nu SELECT the Shutdown Restart procedure 2 On the Shutdown Restart procedure window SELECT the Shutdown pushbutton If you decide that you do not want to shutdown or restart the system SELECT the Cancel pushbutton If the printers are in duplex mode or if the printers are in dual simplex mode and the final simplex printer is being shutdown the following messages appear e The message Shutdown in Progress appears after you select the Shutdown pushbutton e Shutdown Complete appears when the shutdown process is complete 3 If necessary switch power off to the system or the individual printer See 6 for details As required correct the problem that caused you to initiate the procedure Restarting the System Note In duplex mode this procedure applies to the complete system both printers In dual simplex mode this procedure applies to the target printer only 1 From the Operate pull down menu SELECT Shutdown Restart 2 On the Shutdown Restart procedure window SELECT the Restart pushbutton 3 Enable the host attachments if necessary See for details 4 Try the operation that was in progress when the Restart was requested again 62 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Enabling and Disabling Attachments Do this task whenever you need to enable functionally connect or disable disconnect the printer from the controlling computer system channel Note that enabling and disabling an attachment is not the
251. nu on the Display Touch Screen window of the printer with which you want to work 3 SELECT the Configure Printer procedure The Configure Printer window appears Use the scroll bar to scroll through the list of configuration items For information about configuration items see fable 160m page 271 or SELECT the Help pushbutton on the Configure Printer window Operate Configure Analyze Options Printer 1 operator panel disabled Yes A Printer 2 operator panel disabled Yes Printer 1 counter 135 Printer 2 counter 135 Jam recovery type Normal jam repositioning A Print Cancel Help Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job Figure 34 Configure Printer Window A2300083 a 4 To print a copy of the configuration do the following a SELECT the Print pushbutton You see the Print Configuration window b To change the number of copies you print do the following 1 SELECT the How Many field 2 Type the number of copies you want to print 3 SELECT the OK pushbutton Chapter 8 Configuring the System 219 Note The printer does not collate multiple copies This has to be done by hand c SELECT the Print pushbutton on the Print Configuration window Important the configuration data is always printed in U S English 5 To change an item a SELECT it from the list You see either a pop up window or a keypad window
252. ocedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure No operator maintenance is required to keep the product in compliance as a Class 1 Laser Product No adjustments that affect laser operation or power are accessible to the operator The following label is located within the front cover of the printer Caution Laser radiation when open Avoid exposure to beam For World Trade printers the following label is applied next to the above label CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 SAFEOOLX LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASSE1 The laser used in the InfoPrint 3000 complies with IEC 825 1 and EN 60825 The printer is a Class 1 Laser Product that contains five enclosed Class IIIb InGaAsP lasers with peak power of 10 milliwatts and a wavelength of 635 nanometers Contained within the printhead the lasers form scanning beams focused at the photoconductor Notices xxiii ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION IBM has established a procedure by which used photoconductor drums can be returned to IBM Specific instructions and a mailing label appear in the box in which the photoconductor drum is shipped Third party servicing companies and customers who are not using IBM service are encouraged to use those procedures Postage is paid by IBM Customers using IBM service should have their drums returned by the service representative The photoconductor drum may be subject to special disposal requireme
253. ode if the side that is displayed in the Side to Adjust field is not the side you want to adjust do the following a SELECT the Side to Adjust field b SELECT the side you want to adjust The choices are 1 Normal Duplex Side 1 2 Normal Duplex Side 2 3 Tumble Duplex Side 1 4 Tumble Duplex Side 2 Notes to the Operator a For dual simplex you have to go through this procedure twice if you want both printers to have identical forms Do the procedure once to adjust the Form Name on Printer 1 and again to adjust the Form Name on Printer 2 b The Front Sheet Sequence printer configuration value informs you which side of the duplex form is being printed on each printer in the system e Front First Value Printer 1 prints Side 1 front side of form and Printer 2 prints Side 2 back side of form e Front Second Value Printer 1 prints Side 2 back side of form and Printer 2 prints Side 1 front side of form 9J for details 6 To print sample pages with the current registration values do the following from the Display Touch Screen Requirement For This Procedure You cannot accomplish this step and the remainder of the procedure if a queued print job is not available a On the Adjust Print window SELECT the Print Test pushbutton This displays the Print Test window b If necessary do the following to update the value in the Number of Pages box e SELECT the Number of Pages box e Use
254. ols Adjusting the Print Position Adjusting the Volume of the Operator Alert Assembly Advancing Forms Using the NPRO ad NPRO Page Functions T E OS NPRO Procedure Simplex Mode Duplex Mode NPRO Page Procedure Simplex Mode Duplex Mode Canceling a Job yos Changing the Password or Authorization Tevel Checking for a Front Facing Page Checking the Forms Alignment Checking Print Quality Cleaning the Oiler Belt Cleaning the Printer Connecting an Accessory to the Operator Alert Contacts Loading Forms Simplex or Deal Simplex Mode Loading Forms Duplex Mode Adjusting the Stacker Table Height 4 Preprocessing and Postprocessing Instructions Powering On and Off Pre Post Devices Enabling Disabling Pre Post Interfaces Using the Printer Stacker Copyright IBM Corp 1998 56 57 57 58 59 60 60 60 60 61 61 62 63 63 63 64 64 65 65 66 68 74 75 75 76 76 76 77 77 78 79 81 84 85 86 88 101 102 115 117 118 118 118 119 Error and Jam Recovery Adding Supplies Nonprocess Runout NPRO Recovering from a Forms Jam Simplex Operations Jams Within the Printer Engine T Jam Recovery Procedures Jams Between the Printer and a Postprocessing Device Recovering from a Forms Jam Duplex Operations Jams Within Printer 1 Jams Within Printer 2 Pg Jam Between Printer 1 and Printer 2 Jams Between the Printer and a Postprocessing Devic
255. on PC Photoconductor PC drum A hollow cylinder that is covered with photoconductive material pel picture element 1 An element of a raster pattern a point where a toned area on the photoconductor may appear 2 On an all points addressable output medium each pel is an 302 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide addressable unit On a row column addressable output medium the only pel addressable is the beginning of a character cell PEM Print error marker perforation A linear series of unconnected cuts in the continuous forms paper The interval between cuts is referred to as a tie The perforation defines either a fold or page boundary See also cut fold perforation microperforation and page perforation photoconductor The material that is wrapped about the drum The medium for transferring images to paper physical page The form on which the printer is printing such as an 8 x 11 inch sheet of paper physical planner The person in an organization who plans the environmental electrical and space requirements for your facility planning coordinator The person in your organization who is responsible for coordinating all the planning and installation activities for the InfoPrint 3000 plant A manufacturing location PME Print Management Facility point of origin The location of the first print position on a logical page The point of origin is usually stated in terms of X and Y coordinates The
256. on when you are defining forms causes the following window to appear Analyze Options Operate Configure Sell Help Define Forms Select a Topic A Summary _ Select Search to search for a form name A keyboard window A appears so you can enter the form name Search If the name is found the list of form names will scroll to that OK position If the name is not found a form not found message is josted New Form p Delete Vv Only the first occurrence of the form name that contains the search string is found Close Lo v Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job Figure 16 Define Forms Help Window A2300174 Chapter 5 Task Summary 53 54 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities Controlling the System Power Local Remote Power Control Powering On the System In Host Controlled Remote Made In Local Controlled Mode Powering Off the System In Host Controlled Remote Mode In Local Controlled Mode Emergency Power Off Shutting Down and Restarting the System Shutting Down the System oe Restarting the System Enabling and Disabling Attachments Remote Channel Enable Disable Local Channel Enable Disable Enabling a Host Attachment Disabling a Host Attachment Adjusting the Display Touch Screen Monitor User Controls A ee On Screen Display Contr
257. onsibilities 167 Left Angle Configuration shows the Buffer Flipper Unit viewed from the front The darker shaded side of the forms in Figure 34 is the side that is printed on Printer 1 The lighter shaded side of the forms is the side that is printed on Printer 2 The longer of the two cross bars 1 is removed from its normal position It is then installed at the lower back of the Buffer Flipper Unit with the support bar 2 Use igure 33 to thread the forms through the Buffer Flipper Unit using the arrows as a guide from Printer 1 at the top of the figure to Printer 2 at the bottom of the figure The result is that the forms are inverted 180 between Printer 1 and Printer 2 The guide collars A through F on the roller bars were adjusted properly when the system was initially installed Adjustments by you are probably not necessary even if you are threading a form through the system with a different width than you previously threaded When the forms are under tension and moving through the Buffer Flipper Unit they run up against the guide collars that are shown HC60G097 Figure 33 Left Angle Configuration 168 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Unloading the Stacker Do this task when you need to remove printed forms from the stacker or when you see the following message stacker FULL 0796 Some controls you need to use to accomplish this task are available only on the stacker control pa
258. ontrol panel If the void or light area is in the shape of an adhesive label your service representative See Print has white streaks Clean the coronas See step b4 on page OF in If necessary remove the coronas and look for forms chads in the wire or corona housing Be careful not to touch the wire with your hands See Print is too light and step ian nage od in If you opened and closed the developer drain without replacing the developer mix replace the developer mix now Opening the drain resets the developer mix usage timer this could result in the developer mix being used beyond its normal life and result in immediate print quality problems See Print rubs off easily If print rubs off solid fill areas logos bar codes on the form press the Lighter Contrast Control key setting on the printer control panel until fuse grade is acceptable Remember to adjust the contrast setting on both printers when they are in duplex mode This balances the contrast between the front and back of the forms Ensure that the Forms Select switch is set correctly for the forms being used Clean the oiler belt See Ensure that the forms were fused For example did you use Forms Feed when you should have used NPRO Ensure that the hot roll shield is up Load a different box of forms The forms you are running may be too heavy more than 160 g m 42 lb when running simplex mode or more than 105
259. or D714 MIC timer 2 error D715 Parity error between MIC and PQE card D716 PQE card failed to initialize D717 Early ACK from intelligent postprocessor D718 MIC failed to send frame to intelligent interface D719 Response timeout on intelligent interface D71A Noise on pre postprocessor port 1 D71B Noise on pre postprocessor port 2 D71C Noise on pre postprocessor port 3 D71D 6 PPI sync pulse missing D71E Scan line error while printing D71F Side1 Side 2 mismatch D720 Verification mark position incorrect D721 Hardware error verification mark sensor D723 MIC memory failure D724 Side 2 verify has been disabled Chapter 10 Responding to Messages 289 290 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Appendix A Valid Form Lengths in Inches Table 31 Examples of Some Valid Form Lengths in Inches Use this value at the Use this value at the Stacker If the Form Length is Display Touch Screen Control Panel 3 0 3 0 See note 2 3 3 5 See note 2 4 0 4 0 See note 2 4 4 5 See note 2 5 0 5 0 See note 2 5 5 5 See note 2 6 0 6 0 See note 2 6 6 5 See note 2 7 0 7 0 7 0 7 7 5 7 8 0 8 0 8 0 81 6 8 1 See note 1 81 3 8 3 81 3 8 8 5 8 82 3 8 6 82 3 See note 1 8 8 See note 1 9 0 9 0 9 0 9 9 5 9 10 0 10 0 10 0 10 10 5 10 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 11 5 11 12 0 12 0 12 0 12 125 12 13 0 13 0 13 0 13 13 5 13 14 0 14 0 14 0 Notes
260. or Message SRC Code In Numeric Order UPPER TRACTOR FORMS JAM 0119 TENSION ARM DOWN 0131 TENSION ARM UP 0132 SKEW ERROR 0133 FUSER WRAP 0134 Forms are NOT jammed torn or separated Recovery Actions 1 N o o N If you do not find a forms jam do the following a Be aware that dark colored backing on the forms can cause the printer to display these messages b The message UPPER TRACTOR FORMS JAM 0119 may appear if the printer engine top cover is open and allowing light to affect an optical sensor Ensure that the top cover is closed c Clean the upper tractor jam sensor See step Open the upper tractor covers and ensure that the tractor holes align with the tractor pins Check to ensure that the perforation on both Printer 1 and Printer 2 are aligned at the correct forms length of the rear tractor alignment scale adjust if necessary See for details If any of the Printer Error messages are still displayed SELECT the Check Reset pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen window Check for and resolve or postpone any other error or intervention message appearing on the Display Touch Screen windows If necessary enter the Thread Align Forms procedure see Forms Complete the Thread Align Forms procedure SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen window If reprinting is allowed all unfused pages between the transfer station in Printer 1 and the top of the stacker plus any jam
261. or the various combination of elements for which you want power on Table 8 Local System Power Control Duplex Models Local Remote Switch Setting Elements To Be Printer 2 Printer 1 Powered On AFCCU Frame Frame PUM Frame Frame AFCCU Printer 1 Local Remote Remote Remote PUM Printer 2 AFCCU Printer 2 Local Remote Local Local AFCCU PUM Printer Local Local Remote Remote 1 For simplex systems When the system master power is to be controlled locally set the Local Remote switches to Local When the Local Remote switch is set to Local do the following 1 Ensure that both printers in a duplex system are connected to a three phase electrical outlet that is reserved for the printers Ensure that the printer in a simplex system is connected to a three phase electrical outlet that is reserved for the printer Press the AFCCU frame Control Unit Power On switch for any of the preceding combinations of elements listed Respond to any error or intervention messages that appear on the Display Touch Screen during the power on sequence At the completion of the power on sequence the Display Touch Screen displays a Printer Status window In duplex mode the Printer Status window is overlaid with a Thread Align Forms procedure window Enable host attachments as required See for details Make the system ready e If you are printing in duplex mode SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the main Disp
262. orms A series of connected forms that feed continuously through a printing device The connection between the forms is perforated to allow the user to tear them apart controlled access area An area where access is limited to authorized personnel controlling computer The processing unit to which the InfoPrint 3000 are attached through a channel interface controlling computer system The data processing system to which a network is connected and with which the system can communicate corner cut In a form a cut or opening of any size containing one or more right angles corona A small diameter wire or wires depending on the function to which a high voltage is applied causing ionization of the air The ionization creates an electrical charge to perform various functions during the printing process CSW Channel status word cure The process of drying ink sufficiently for minimum transfer of the ink to any parts of the printer it contacts cut The severed part of a perforation Cuts are separated by ties cutout A part of the form that has been eliminated or perforated for subsequent removal for example corner cuts and binder holes D DASD Direct access storage device data streaming A noninterlocked method of data transfer used by the printer channel to decrease data transfer time during write operations DBCS Double byte character set DCF Document Composition Facility developed image The imag
263. orms pushbutton on the window as many times as necessary to advance the forms enough to thread the postprocessing device 11 SELECT the Completed pushbutton on the window which removes this window This completes this type of Thread Align Forms procedure 12 To resume printing the queued job SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the main Display Touch Screen window 166 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Threading the Buffer Flipper Unit Straight Line Configuration Figure 32 shows the Buffer Flipper Unit viewed from the front The darker shaded side of the forms in is the side that is printed on Printer 1 The lighter shaded side of the forms is the side that is printed on Printer 2 Use Figure 32 to thread the forms through the Buffer Flipper Unit using the arrows as a guide from Printer 1 at the top of the figure to Printer 2 at the bottom of the figure The result is that the forms are inverted 180 between Printer 1 and Printer 2 The guide collars A through F on the roller bars were adjusted properly when the system was initially installed Adjustments by you are probably not necessary even if you are threading a form through the system with a different width than you previously threaded When the forms are under tension and moving through the Buffer Flipper Unit they run up against the guide collars that are shown w N HC60 O Figure 32 Inline Configuration Chapter 6 Operator Resp
264. orrect all following duplex print jobs are printed with incorrect alignment between the front and back of the pages 10 If a postprocessing device is installed and not threaded SELECT the Feed Forms pushbutton on the window as many times as necessary to advance the forms enough to thread the postprocessing device Printer 2 starts printing Side 2 pages on the page following the alignment page If the job is long enough Printer 1 continues printing Side 1 pages 11 SELECT the Completed pushbutton on the window This completes this type of the Thread Align Forms procedure 12 To resume printing the queued job SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the main Display Touch Screen window Forms Are Broken Between the Printers A jam occurring between Printer 1 and Printer 2 normally causes the forms to tear and separate Printer 1 continues to print and dump forms out on the floor between Printer 1 and Printer 2 Printer 2 feeds forms and prints until an END OF FORMS 078A Intervention Required Display Touch Screen window appears At which time both printers stop feeding forms The following procedure gives you a method of splicing the separated forms back together between Printer 1 and Printer 2 so that rethreading Printer 2 and a postprocessing device if installed is not required This procedure assumes the following 162 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide e You have visually checked the forms path and found it separated between
265. ovement of the forms stopped If this occurs there are some small number of lost pages that are not automatically reprinted You need to work with the host system console operator to take action to recover those lost pages Also if automatic reprinting is not allowed you need to work with the host system console operator to recover lost pages by one of the following actions e Restart the job at the point where the output was lost e Restart the entire job Similar to recovering from a forms jam in simplex mode you must rethread the printer with the jam However in addition to rethreading the printer with the jam you may also have to rethread the other printer if the jam occurred in Printer 1 Wherever rethreading is required the Thread Align Forms Display Touch Screen procedure window automatically appears and requires you to execute and complete that procedure see Important To clear the jam message from the Display Touch Screen window the printer logic requires the following e For STACKER JAM 161 and STACKER JAM 164 open and close the stacker gate or you must lower and then raise the stacker table e Press the Check Reset pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen 128 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Jams Within Printer 1 Do this task when the Printer Error Hisplay Touch Screen window shows one of the messages that is listed in Table 13 Printer 1 Jam Recovery Procedures Duplex Mode Error Message SRC
266. owing area at least once each week Oiler belt See 84 for instructions Recommendations for Cleaning the Printer e You may need to clean the printer more often especially before and after printing labels e The following procedure specifies that you unload forms from the printer before you clean Unloading forms before you clean requires that you reload forms after you finish cleaning Loading forms is a time consuming activity and requires flushing forms out of the entire forms path then reloading and threading the entire forms path IBM recommends that for normal once per day cleaning of the printer you leave forms loaded on the printer and do the best job you can working around the forms to follow all of the cleaning steps IBM also recommends that you do an additional cleaning when you load a new form type or when you have cleared the forms path e You should clean the printer only with a vacuum cleaner that is approved for toner applications e You need the following items to clean the printer Toner certified vacuum cleaner Cloth or paper towels To clean the printer do the following 1 Disable the host attachments See for details 2 Separate the forms at a perforation below the forms guide on the transfer station 3 Move the static brush to the left with your hand so that the forms fall back into the input area Ensure that forms do not cover the end of forms sensor in the input area
267. plies service For some supplies you can temporarily bypass this message and continue processing other supplies require you to replace them immediately e Intervention Required messages indicate that the printer needs basic service that involves handling forms or checking on mechanical conditions such as an open gate You must handle all messages of this type before printing can continue e Printer Error messages indicate that the printer or the control unit has a hardware problem such as a forms jam or a component failure Processing stops so that you can attempt to correct the problem or if necessary call for service You can postpone action for some messages of this type others you must handle immediately Some printed pages may be lost or damaged because of printer errors for more information about d a 2 lippe on pa ge J for more information about 12 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Service Call Procedure Use this procedure only when you have tried all of the operator actions that are described in the error message or listed in this book 1 Collect information about the printer system including the machine type model number and serial number This information is on a label 1 behind the center front cover above the toner cartridge on the diagonal frame of the transfer station You will be asked for this information when you place the service call HC60G061 2 Collect information that is related
268. point of origin used by a printer can be affected by factors such as printable area and forms orientation portrait orientation Pertaining to a display or hard copy with greater height than width PPFA Page Printer Formatting Aid preprinted form A sheet of forms containing a preprinted design of constant data with which variable data can be combined See also electronic overlay Print Management Facility PMF An interactive menu driven program that can be used to create and modify fonts and to define output formatting for data printed on the IBM InfoPrint 3000 print mode The operational mode in which information is received from the attached controlling computer system and printed output is produced Contrast with test mode and diagnostic mode print position The physical positions of the characters constituting a print line relative to the form print quality The quality of printed output relative to existing standards and in comparison with jobs printed earlier Print Quality Enhancement PQE A printer facility that provides edge smoothing along diagonal lines fine fidelity protection and independent boldness control Print Services Access Facility PSAF A menu driven print parameter selection program for page printers controlled by PSF print surface The side of a form that receives the printed image printer utility module PUM A section of Printer 1 in a duplex configuration It includes e Opera
269. r s Guide Operate Configure Analyze E Enter the description 20 character maximum A Z a z 0 9 Options Overwrite Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job ne J Figure 6 Alphanumeric Keyboard Window A2300111 Selection Devices on the Display Touch Screen Windows The following sections summarize the controls you use to interact with the printers Fingertip Control When you touch the surface of the Display Touch Screen with your finger a small plus symbol appears directly under your finger tip Moving your finger across the surface moves the symbol Removing your finger from the surface of the monitor selects the action or item on which the symbol rests Pushbuttons Pushbuttons look like three dimensional pushbutton switches They allow you to select a particular action which occurs immediately An ellipsis that follows a pushbutton name means that selecting the pushbutton causes a another procedure window or a pop up window to appear Selectable Field A selectable field on a procedure window or a pop up window displays the current setting of an item that you can change To change the setting SELECT the field A pop up window appears containing one of the following e Two or more choices from which you can select e A selection list box with many items from which you can select See 4 in for an example of a pop up window with a selection list
270. r s Guide Configuring Remote Access This procedure lets you enable and configure remote access to the printer You can use these methods e SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol e RMI Remote Management Interface e Modem To configure remote access do the following 1 SELECT the Configure pull down menu on the main Display Touch Screen window 2 SELECT the Remote Access procedure Operate Configure Options Remote Access Analyze Enabled Select a Remote Access O Yes SNMP O No RMI Allow to Configure Community Name Modem O Yes O No Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job 3 SELECT the type of remote access that is to be used 4 Enable or disable remote access for the type of remote access that you chose in the previous step NWTO0168 Note If Allow to Configure is set to Yes for SNMP or RMI that interface is allowed to remotely change selected printer configuration items Chapter 8 Configuring the System 245 5 SELECT the Community Name procedure to configure additional SNMP parameters Operate Options Configure Analyze Remote Access SNMP Select a community Access Co Read IP Address O Write None Netmask Z Trap Manager O Yes o O No OK Add Delete Cancel Help Access Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job 246 InfoPrin
271. r information and do not necessarily mean that something is wrong However if a printer is not performing the way you think it should a status message can give you a clue about what to do Figure 49 shows a sample Printer Status window The Printer Status window automatically appears when the system is powered on If you have closed the window you can see it again by SELECTING Printer Status from the Operate pull down menu Operate Configure Analyze Options 1 L Printer Status i 5 Status Attachments F Parallel Channel A Disabled Not Ready Vv Parallel Channel B Disabled 3 J Tracing Messages No Attachments Enabled Printer 1 Counter 135 Feet Printer 2 Counter 135 Feet Reset Counter 4 Feet Printhead resolution 600 Reset Hel gt kL Pe Printer Error D205 lt Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job Figure 42 Printer Status Window HC60G092 o The window contains the following e Printer Status H In duplex mode this field displays a 2 line overall system status SELECTING this field displays more detailed information about both printers and their preprocessing postprocessing device interfaces In simplex mode this field displays a 2 line status for the individual printer SELECTING this field displays more detailed information about the printer and its preprocessing postprocessing device interfaces The status mes
272. r mix drain hose 5 Grasp the drain hose and turn the capped end up upward so that any developer mix in the hose from the last change does not spill Remove the cap from the hose Chapter 7 Ordering and Replacing Supplies 193 isp ise fo oO Q O p 6 Carefully insert the end of the hose into the empty developer mix bottle Ensure that the hose is inserted securely and that no sharp bends obstruct the hose 194 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide HC60G015 7 Locate the Developer Mix Inlet 1 the Developer Drain Lever B 2 and the Developer Run Pushbutton A 3 in the developer area m Important a Never open the developer drain unless the developer drain hose is inserted into an empty developer mix bottle b After you have opened and closed the developer drain you must replace the developer mix Opening the drain resets the developer mix usage timer Resetting the timer without changing the developer mix could result in severe print quality problems that are caused by the developer mix being used beyond its normal life Chapter 7 Ordering and Replacing Supplies 195 HC60G032 8 Open the Developer Drain Lever B by pulling out the lever and then lifting it upward 9 The developer mix starts draining immediately Hold the drain hose so that it does not come out of the empty mix bottle Shake the hose several times while the mix is draining to ensure that no developer mix remains in
273. r station area e Printer control panel e Transfer station control lever e Puller control lever e Fuser entry area e Stacker area stacker control panel and forms length and width controls e Rear service area Forms and the Forms Path Form refers to pages on which the printer can print Forms can be blank paper preprinted paper adhesive labels cards or any other printable material that meets the required specifications Paper is a specific fiber based material that is used for forms The term forms path refers to the entire route that forms travel while they are being processed The forms path begins in the forms input area and ends in the stacker area AOINE shows the forms path for a simplex printer and the major elements within the printer engine Note that the path looks a bit different if you use preprocessing or postprocessing devices attached to your printer Copyright IBM Corp 1998 15 TN f k HC60G002 o Figure 1 Forms Path Through a Printer Engine For simplicity Figure 1 shows a generalized forms path when a printer is being used for simplex printing and is using boxed fan fold forms Transfer Station Fuser Stacker Pendulum Output Stacker Area Postprocessor O ua FPF WO N me Input Forms Area e Note the following differences when a printer runs in dual simplex mode uses forms from a
274. ract Customer Replaceable Supply Items You have these options for ordering supplies e You can purchase toner developer and other supplies through Lexmark You can contact Lexmark at 1 800 438 2468 or through any Lexmark International authorized supply dealer e You can fax a completed order to Lexmark at 1 800 522 3422 Chapter 7 Ordering and Replacing Supplies 177 Warranty Returns If the supplies you receive are defective return them to the place of purchase during the warranty period for a free replacement Include the following with the supplies you are retuning e A copy of your invoice e A description of the problem e Print quality samples e An estimate of the amount of printing already done with that supply This information applies only to supplies purchased in the U S A In other countries contact your point of purchase for returns information Storing Supplies Store printer supplies in the printer operating environment for at least one day before using them At other times you can store supplies in an environment that does not exceed the following requirements Temperature 25 to 40 C 13 to 104 F Relative Humidity 5 to 90 Forms have different storage requirements Store forms in an area where temperature and humidity are similar to the environment in which they will be used If forms do not adapt to moisture changes wrinkles and voids can occur during printing Avoid areas of extrem
275. re using forms with a 1 3 inch or 2 inch increment ensure that the fold is on a perforation that is centered between tractor holes This occurs only once every three pages e If the stack of forms seems to curve dishing roll the first form in the opposite direction of the curve and then unroll it before you put the form on the transfer station lower tractors A message appears repeatedly on the Display Touch Screen window None all of the actions described in the message e If the message continues call your service epresentative See Feenine Call See PTE A status message is displayed for a long time without changing Some messages give status about operations that really do take a long time For example during a Restart operation the control unit is transferring programs from the hard disk into the control unit memory it cannot display a new message until those programs are up and running e Wait at least five minutes before you attempt any recovery action If the message does not change and recovery actions fail use the EE a reo acs to coast your service representative The Display Touch Screen monitor is blank all indicators are off and the printer is silent The printer is not getting any electrical power Determine if some or all of your building is experiencing a power outage If not use the ervice Ca lu i to contact your service representative Some func
276. rear of the printer open the rear center cover 2 Ensure that the toner collector is pushed firmly to the rear of the toner collector recess 3 If you had just replaced the toner collector bag when this message appeared try reinstalling the toner collector case 4 If you have not replaced the toner collector bag replace it now Use care when yon remove the toner collector in case it is over filled See anging Note If you remove the toner collector case without replacing the bag the printer resets its counter and may cause an overflow of toner in the collector bag 5 Ensure that the toner collector case is latched correctly 6 Close the rear center cover of the printer 186 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide 7 To resume processing SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the main Display Touch Screen 8 If the CHECK TONER COLLECTOR message appears again repeat steps through bon page 184 If that still does not correct the problem contact your service representative See a a instructions Chapter 7 Ordering and Replacing Supplies 187 Changing the Toner Collector Attention You must do this task immediately You cannot delay it as you can for some other Out of Supplies conditions You may leave printer power on while you do this procedure but the printer should not be printing Never reuse waste toner Doing so severely reduces print quality and may require repair of the printer Do this task when
277. recovery point distance defined in the printer configuration in Printer 2 are reprinted Check for and discard duplicate pages 10 If reprinting is not allowed work with the host system console operator to recover the lost pages 44 if the error recurs HC60G094 Figure 27 Reestablishing Forms Alignment 130 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Jams Within Printer 2 Do this task when the Printer Error Display Touch Screen window shows one of the messages that is listed in Table 14 Printer 2 Jam Recovery Procedures Duplex Mode Error Message SRC Code In Numeric Order Recovery Actions UPPER TRACTOR FORMS JAM 0119 TENSION ARM DOWN 0131 TENSION ARM UP 0132 SKEW ERROR 0133 FUSER WRAP 0134 Forms are jammed torn or separated Clear the forms path See If any of the Printer Error messages are still displayed SELECT the Check for and resolve or postpone any other error or intervention If necessary enter the Thread Align Forms procedure see Forms SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen window If reprinting is allowed all unfused pages between the Transfer If reprinting is not allowed work with the host system console Check Reset pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen window message appearing on the Display Touch Screen windows a SELECT the Feed Forms pushbutton twice this provides enough forms beyond Printer 1 to load Printer 2 b
278. red 277 out of supplies 276 printer error 274 program check 272 responding to 271 280 291 soft program check 272 status 278 miscellaneous symptom table 269 mix developer 20 177 modem remote access 245 monthly usage reporting 146 multiple procedures 39 N new forms adjust print non process runout NPRO non selectable field 41 not ready status 12 NPRO Main Window pushbutton 35 NPRO Page 76 Operate procedure 46 75 procedure 75 single sheet advance 76 NPRO Page 46 76 O oil adding fuser 179 oil fuser 177 oil pan checking absorbent pad 212 oil reservoir 180 181 oiler belt 177 oiler belt cleaning 86 operate pull down menu 45 operator alert assembly 74 operator authorization level change 79 72 73 46 75 operator instructions pre and postprocessing 118 operator intervention light 17 operator panel 17 operator responsibilities password protection 79 summary of 9 task summary 43 53 options pull down menu 50 ordering IBM supplies customer replaceable items 177 developer mix 177 fine filter 177 fuser oil 177 maintenance items 177 oiler belt 177 ordering 177 storing 178 suggested quantities 176 toner 177 toner collector 177 warranty returns 178 worksheet 176 ordering supplies 177 out of supplies messages 276 P page counter meter 146 paper 15 parallel channel configuration 232 password protection 79 password changing 79 path forms definition 15 pendulum 15 27 pointer 41 poor fu
279. reen window Disabling a Host Attachment He From the Options pull down menu SELECT the Enable Disable Attachments procedure From the list of currently installed attachments SELECT the attachment you want to disable then SELECT the Disable pushbutton If you want the printer active for attachments that are not disabled choose one of the following methods e In duplex mode SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen main window e In dual simplex mode SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the target printer Display Touch Screen window e In simplex mode SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen window 64 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Adjusting the Display Touch Screen Monitor You may decide that some physical aspect of the information image that is displayed on the face of the monitor needs adjusting You can adjust the image with the user controls at the bottom of the monitor and the On Screen Display OSD icons User Controls OOO amp 0 o NWTM0990 Figure 17 Operator Console User Controls The controls at the bottom of the monitor are for the following tasks e Switching the monitor on and off e Adjusting contrast and brightness e Activating and adjusting the On Screen Display OSD control icons Table 9 describes the controls and how to use them Table 9 User Controls on the Monitor Using This Control Does This
280. rint check As used in InfoPrint 3000 action messages instructs the printer operator to inspect a component For example the CHECK TONER COLLECTOR message indicates that the operator should look at the toner collector bottle and ensure that it is physically present in the proper place and correctly installed clear As used in InfoPrint 3000 action messages instructs the printer operator to remove crumpled forms paper scraps and other debris from the printer For example the CLEAR UPPER TRACTOR message indicates that forms are wedged in the transfer station area and the operator must remove them before the printer can operate coated paper Paper that has had a surface coating applied to produce smoothness 298 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide configuration 1 The arrangement of a computer system or network as defined by the nature the number and the chief characteristics of its functional units More specifically the term configuration may refer to a hardware configuration or a software configuration 2 The devices and programs that make up a system subsystem or network configure The procedure used to customize the InfoPrint 3000 to a specific operating and communication environment connector A means of establishing electrical flow constant data Data that does not change for example the company letterhead and standard text in form letters or the headings and boxes on a preprinted form continuous f
281. rketing Representative An IBM representative who takes product orders 300 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide IBM MMR Similar to MMR 2 dimensional image compression algorithm IBM Service Representative An IBM representative who services IBM products in the field IBM World Trade Corporation A subsidiary of IBM that manufactures and markets IBM products outside of the United States of America IHF Image Handling Facility IML Initial microcode load impact printer A printer in which printing is the result of mechanical impacts Contrast with nonimpact printer installation 1 In system development preparing and placing a functional unit in position for use 2 A particular computing system including the work it does and the people who manage it operate it apply it to problems service it and use the results it produces installation verification procedure A procedure distributed with IBM licensed programs that tests the newly installed IBM programs to verify that the basic facilities of the programs are functioning correctly Intelligent Printer Data Stream IPDS Information the system sends to printers that contains decision making capability Generally this information contains basic formatting error recovery and character data I O Input Output IOCA Image Object Content Architecture IPDS Intelligent Printer Data Stream IPL Initial program load IPM Impressions per minute ISO sizes Perta
282. rocessing and postprocessing devices are powered on and ready e The Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen main window has been selected When the printer is operating normally the following happens e In simplex mode forms move 1 From the preprocessor or forms input area 2 Through the transfer station and fuser 3 Into the stacker or postprocessor area e In duplex mode forms continue 1 Past the stacker area of Printer 1 through the Buffer Flipper Unit 2 Into the Urge Unit in the forms input area of Printer 2 through the transfer station and fuser 3 Into the stacker or postprocessor area of Printer 2 e If you are using the on board stacker the stacker table slowly lowers as it fills e The word Receiving appears on the Display Touch Screen When Receiving is on the screen data is being received from the controlling computer system e The Display Touch Screen windows present messages Chapter 2 Operator s Overview 11 Operator Intervention Not Ready Status When normal operation is interrupted the printer goes into a Not Ready status SELECTING the Stop pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen window can cause a Not Ready status In addition whenever the printer detects an Out of Supplies Intervention Required or Printer Error condition it places itself in Not Ready status An error message also appears on the Display Touch Screen e Out of Supplies messages indicate that the printer needs basic sup
283. ror condition presented is a Pre postprocessor NOT READY line became active D204 message on a Printer Error Display Touch Screen window or a PRINTER ERROR D204 message This error message occurs when the Pre postprocessor Busy Timer of an installed and enabled postprocessing device has timed out see for details 1 Clear the forms path of any jam or clear any forms feeding problem between the postprocessing device and the printer 2 SELECT the Check Reset pushbutton on the Printer Error Display Touch Screen window 3 If you must remove damaged or separated forms in the forms path between the postprocessing device and the printer advance the forms through the printers enough to splice on the floor between the printer and the postprocessing device the forms exiting the printer to the forms remaining in the postprocessing device 4 Make the postprocessing device Ready 5 SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen for the affected printer InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Recovering from a Forms Jam in the Postprocessing Device When a forms jam occurs in a postprocessing device that causes the device to go to a Not Ready condition the Intervention Required window provides an additional pushbutton Jam Recovery This pushbutton causes a number of pages to be reprinted The number of pages that are reprinted is determined by the distance from the printer to the farthest postprocessing device that is attach
284. s Length in millimeters or inches Description Preheat temperature Name Width in millimeters or inches Length in millimeters or inches Description Preheat temperature Name Width in millimeters or inches Length in millimeters or inches Description Preheat temperature Name Width in millimeters or inches Length in millimeters or inches Description Preheat temperature 264 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Chapter 9 Print Quality and Problem Solving Print Quality Problems 266 Problem Solving Tips and Suggested Actions 269 Sudden Failures 268 This chapter contains information for understanding and solving unusual problems that may occur when you use the printer The first part of this chapter describes Print Quality problems and the second part of this chapter describes Problem Solving tips and suggested actions Copyright IBM Corp 1998 265 Print Quality Problems Many print quality problems are directly related to the kind of forms that are being used and the application that is being processed If a particular form or application regularly produces unsatisfactory output refer the application owner to the Forms Design Reference for Continuous Forms Advanced Function Printers G544 3921 This publication contains detailed information about selecting forms and designing
285. s 100 This value must not be changed Printer Counter CE Change Only 0 to 2 000 000 N A 000 Printhead resolution not all values are 480 DPI supported on all printers lt 600 DPI e 480 600 DPI IPDS Resolution Automatic e 240 DPI e 300 DPI e 600 DPI Font Enhancement Single Byte Double Byte Yes No Font Jam Recovery Type e Use Normal Jam Repositioning e Suppress MICR Jam Repositioning e Suppress All Jam Repositioning Font Usage Low Medium High Page Segment Usage Low Medium High Overlay Usage Low Medium High Overlay Cache Yes No Input Buffer Size Low Medium High Output Buffer Size Low Medium High Direct Attach Yes No NPRO Length 0 to 1200 inches Auto NPRO at EOF Yes No Jam Recovery Point Distance 0 to 500 inches Logical Page Increment 0 to 20 pels Clear Memory for Security Yes No 258 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Table 25 Configuration Worksheet Simplex Model continued Item Available Values Selected Value Screen Saver Timeout 0 to 60 minutes Alarm Suppression Yes No Fuser Inactivity Timer 0 to 9 hours Eject to Front Facing Yes No Form definition order Yes No Stacker Enabled Yes No Cut sheet emulation None e Normal Left to Right e Normal Right to Left e Inverted Left to Right e Inverted Right to Left BTS Installed
286. s and ensure that the tractor holes align with the tractor pins Check to ensure that the perforation on both Printer 1 and Printer 2 are aligned at the correct forms length of the tractor station alignment scale and adjust if necessary See igure 27 on page Tad for details If there is no post processing device attached to Printer 2 press the Table Up key on the Printer 2 stacker control panel to make the forms taut If any of the Printer Error messages are still displayed SELECT the Check Reset pushbutton on the Printer Error Display Touch Screen window Check for and resolve or postpone any other error or intervention message appearing on the Display Touch Screen windows If necessary enter the Thread Align Forms procedure see Complete the Thread Align Forms procedure SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen window If reprinting is allowed all unfused pages between the Transfer Station in Printer 1 and the top of the Stacker in Printer 2 are reprinted Check for and discard duplicate pages If reprinting is not allowed work with the host system console operator to recover the lost pages See ooestion 44 if the error recurs frequently 132 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Table 14 Printer 2 Jam Recovery Procedures Duplex Mode continued Error Message SRC Code In Numeric Order STACKER FORMS JAM 0161 STACKER FORMS JAM 0164 These errors are not set when a postprocessing dev
287. s associated control unit in simplex mode when one of the two system printers is not operable and needs repair In either mode and with the use of either printer you must switch the AFCCU power on How you switch power on for the system depends on whether power control is set to Local or Remote Notes 1 To switch power on for Printer 1 with Printer 2 powered off the AFCCU frame must still have power on 2 The Unit Emergency switch in each printer must be in the Power Enable position before you can switch power on to that printer 3 If a D208 error occurs after you switch power on for the system do the following a Switch power off for the system b Wait two minutes c Switch power on for the system again If you are operating the system in dual simplex mode and leave one printer powered off the D208 error remains on the powered off printer window Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 57 In Host Controlled Remote Mode For duplex systems When the system master power control is from the host system console set the Local Remote switches as shown in able 7 for the various combinations of elements you want to be powered on Table 7 Remote System Power Control Duplex Models Local Remote Switch Setting Elements To Be Printer 2 Printer 1 Powered On AFCCU Frame Frame PUM Frame Frame AFCCU Printer 1 Remote Remote Remote Remote PUM Printer 2 AFCCU Printer 2 Remote Remote Local Local AFCCU PUM
288. s automatically supplied when two System 370 Parallel channels are installed 304 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide U up fold Fanfold forms are alternately folded When fanfold forms are unfolded and held horizontally a fold is an up fold if it points up from the horizontal surface V variable data The data that can vary for example the names and addresses in form letters vector graphics Computer graphics in which display images are generated from display commands and coordinate data Contrast with raster pattern Virtual Storage Extended VSE An operating system that is an extension of Disk Operating System Virtual Storage OS VS Virtual Storage Extended Advanced Functions VSE AF The minimum operating system support for a VSE controlled installation VSE SP Virtual Storage Extended System Product void 1 A missing part of the printed character 2 A missing piece of a continuous form X X axis In printing the axis perpendicular to the direction in which the paper moves through the printer Y X axis In printing the axis parallel with the direction in which the paper moves through the printer Index A absorbent oil pad checking 212 adding developer mix 191 forms definitions 247 fuser oil 179 pre postprocessing device interfaces 241 supplies 119 toner 182 adjusting Display Touch Screen monitor 65 horizontal print 72 labels print position 72 73 new forms print position 72 7
289. s width sensor 0118 Forms width sensor fuse 0119 Forms jam at upper tractor 011E Tractor motor initial position error 0121 Drum rotation error 0122 Drum motor overcurrent 0131 Tension arm down 0132 Tension arm up 0133 Skew error 0134 Fuser wrap 0135 Backup roll motor thermal 0136 Backup roll closed error 0137 Steering motor driver 013A Backup roll drive signal on 013B Backup roll not open 0141 Felt oiler belt driver error 0142 Oil pump driver error 0143 Felt oiler belt motor always driven 0144 Felt oiler belt motor never driven 0145 Oil pump always driven 0146 Oil pump never driven 0152 Scuff roll motor thermal 0156 Backup roll lift motor position error 0157 Backup roll lift motor overcurrent 0161 Stacker jam light never sensed 0162 Pendulum motor overcurrent 0163 Pendulum position error 0164 Stacker jam light always sensed 0166 Pendulum interface error 0167 Pendulum motor overcurrent 0169 Stacker cooling blower revolution error 0171 Stacker table motor thermal Chapter 10 Responding to Messages 281 Table 30 SRC Messages continued Code Message Text Type Printer Error unless noted otherwise 0172 Stacker table timeout 0174 Stacker safety switch on 0175 Stacker table motor runs too long 0176 Stacker forms length sensor 017 Stacker length motor timeout 017A Right finger
290. sages that may appear in each line in this field are shown in e Attachments Status This field contains a line of status for each installed host system interface e System Status This field contains An overall system attachments status 278 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Counters that show the total number of feet of forms run through the printers since they were originally manufactured A reset counter that shows the number of feet of forms processed through the system or printer since the last time the counter was reset You can press the Reset Counter pushbutton to reset the counter e Messages This field displays any postponed Printer Error messages and any active no action taken at this time Out of Supplies or Intervention Required messages To act on a postponed message select the message from the list Note Printer status appears on the printer Display Touch Screen Status Message Summary Table 29 Printer Status Window Status Field Messages Message Description LINE 1 READY In duplex mode the complete system is ready to accept print jobs from the host system In simplex mode only the individual printer is ready NOT READY In duplex mode the complete system is not ready to accept print jobs from the host system In simplex mode only the individual printer is not ready NOT READY AT PRINTER 1 In duplex mode the system is not ready to accept print jobs from the host syste
291. scroll up and down in the field by selecting the up and down arrows of the scroll bar ma A2600019 This is the scroll box The scroll box varies in size and location within the scroll bar which indicate how much more information is available in the corresponding field If the scroll box fills the entire space between the scroll bar arrows then all text is currently displayed and the scroll bar is not active If it does not fill the scroll bar scrolling up or down reveals more information The scroll box moves down within the scroll bar as you scroll down within the information Grayed out text Text that is grayed out signifies that the procedure or pushbutton is inactive You cannot select a grayed out item Chapter 4 Using the Display Touch Screen 41 Table 5 Symbols and Visual Cues continued Visual Cue Explanation A2600020 This symbol indicates that there are active procedure windows that are not displayed on the Display Touch Screen You must use the Switch to procedure in the system menu to view active procedure windows that are not displayed A2600028 This symbol appears within some field boxes that you can change When you select a field containing this symbol a keyboard keypad or hexpad window appears for you to make an entry A2600021 This symbol appears within some field boxes It indicates that this field contains more choices than are currently
292. serial number for Printer 1 7 numeric only characters Each time the AFCCU hard disk is replaced this data is lost the CE must enter the serial number found on the rear inside of the AFCCU frame again N A Manufacturing Plant for Printer 1 CE Change on Initial Configuration Only This is the code for plant of manufacture of Printer 1 2 numeric only characters Each time the AFCCU hard disk is replaced this data is lost the CE must enter this code again from information saved from the last time Printer Configurations were changed N A Machine Sequence for Printer 2 CE Change on Initial Configuration Only This is the serial number for Printer 1 7 numeric only characters Each time the AFCCU hard disk is replaced this data is lost the CE must enter the serial number found on the rear inside of the AFCCU frame again N A Manufacturing Plant for Printer 2 CE Change on Initial Configuration Only This is the code for the plant of manufacture of Printer 2 2 numeric only characters Each time the AFCCU hard disk is replaced this data is lost the CE must enter this code again from information saved from the last time Printer Configurations were changed N A Date and Time CE Change Only This is in the form of mmddHHMM ssyy mm month dd day HH hour MM minute ss second yy year N A 228 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Configuring the Host Attachments This procedure le
293. set Adjustment for Printer CE Change Only 0 0 to 15 9 N A N A N A 1 Beam 3 Offset Adjustment for Printer CE Change Only 0 0 to 15 9 N A N A N A 1 Beam 4 Offset Adjustment for Printer CE Change Only 0 0 to 15 9 N A N A N A 1 Beam 5 Offset Adjustment for Printer CE Change Only 0 0 to 15 9 N A N A N A 1 Beam 1 Offset Adjustment for Printer CE Change Only 0 0 to 15 9 N A N A N A 2 Beam 2 Offset Adjustment for Printer CE Change Only 0 0 to 15 9 N A N A N A 2 Beam 3 Offset Adjustment for Printer CE Change Only 0 0 to 15 9 N A N A N A 2 Beam 4 Offset Adjustment for Printer CE Change Only 0 0 to 15 9 N A N A N A 2 Beam 5 Offset Adjustment for Printer CE Change Only 0 0 to 15 9 N A N A N A 2 Machine Sequence for Printer 1 CE change on initial N A N A N A configuration only Manufacturing Plant for Printer 1 CE change on initial N A N A N A configuration only Machine Sequence for Printer 2 CE change on initial N A N A N A configuration only Manufacturing Plant for Printer 2 CE change on initial N A N A N A configuration only Date and Time CE Change Only N A N A N A HOST ATTACHMENTS CONFIGURATION Parallel Channel Attachment Parallel Link A Installed Yes No Parallel Link B Installed Yes No Device Address 00 to FF Second Channel Static Dynamic Data Transfer Protocol Interlocked Data Streaming Data Streaming Rate 1 9 2 7 3 4 4 5 MB sec Card 1 Slot Position
294. sing 151 poor registration 267 power controlling 56 60 Power Off if in Local Control Unit Power switch 18 56 Power Off if in Local Printer Power switch 18 56 Power Off If In Local switch 19 Power On Control Unit Power switch 18 56 Power On Printer Power switch 18 56 power on off 18 56 Power On Reset switch 19 power supply 15 power switches 18 56 powering on and off sequence 118 pre post device switch 32 preheat control knob 151 preprinted forms 72 73 preprocessing instructions 118 preprocessing postprocessing devices adding supplies 119 clearing jams 126 configuring 241 enabling disabling Pre Post interfaces 118 error and jam recovery 119 nonprocess runout NPRO 75 preprocessing postprocessing devices continued nonprocess runout NPRO on pre postprocessor 120 nonprocess runout NPRO page 75 powering on and off 118 single sheet advance 76 using the printer stacker 119 prevention jam suggestions 144 print adjustment 68 bloom 268 quality checking 85 checking print samples 85 problems 85 quality symptom table 266 rubs off 267 print position settings horizontal 72 vertical 73 print resolution switching 174 Print Samples Analyze procedure 49 printer characteristics 3 cleaning 88 display windows 33 error messages 274 jobs canceling 78 reporting usage 146 printer display touch screen description 23 Forms Feed key 24 Forms Select key 29 Forms Set indicators and key 24 printer icons developer
295. ss Sets the unique LAN adapter address for the network X 0 to X FFFFFFFFFFFF Local adapter The address must be different from other addresses on address the LAN Confine Broadcast Specifies if broadcast packets that is Address Resolution Yes or No Protocol packets are enabled to cross bridges to other rings 240 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Configuring Preprocessing Postprocessing Devices Interfaces This procedure lets you add delete or change specifications for preprocessing and postprocessing device interface features You may configure and store up to ten defined preprocessing postprocessing devices each configured for either Printer 1 or Printer 2 But only three devices may be enabled for each printer The printers have three interface ports These ports may be equipped with Preprocessing ens Wega Cre Post or Advanced Function Postprocessing AF Post interfaces as shown in Port 1 comes standard with a Pre Post device interface adaptor and the following table assumes that adaptor is installed Table 22 Preprocessing Postprocessing Interface Options Port Configuration Options 1 Pre Post Pre Post Pre Post Pre Post Pre Post Pre Post 2 Pre Post Pre Post AF Post Pre Post AF Post 3 Pre Post AF Post Pre Post Port 3 is not available on Model ES1 The procedure for changing your pre postprocessor configuration follows 1 Do one of the followi
296. st of the printable material the adhesive and the carrier carrier holes The holses in teh side margins on continuous forms paper When placed on the tractor pins the holes maintain paper alignment and registration and control the movement of the paper Synonymous with tractor holes CCITT Comite Consultatif International Telegraphique et Telephonique CCW Channel command word CE Customer Engineer IBM CGPC Canadian Grocery Product Code chad 1 The material separated from a data medium when punching a hole 2 The residue separated from the carrier holes in continuous forms change As used in InfoPrint 3000 action messages instructs the printer operator to remove and discard a used component and then install a new one For example the CHANGE TONER COLLECTOR message indicates that the operator should take out the toner collector bottle throw it away and put in a new one channel command An instruction directing a data channel control unit or device to perform an operation or set of operations character A letter number punctuation mark or special graphic used for the production of text character set 1 A finite set of different characters that is complete for a given purpose for example the character set in ISO Standard 646 7 bit Coded Character Set of Information Processing Interchange 2 A group of characters used for a specific reason for example the set of characters a printer can p
297. st job on plain paper forms to remove any adhesive residue that the labels may have left in the printer If you are using fan fold forms ensure that you leave four to five blank forms correctly folded in the stacker when you resume printing Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 145 Reporting Printer Usage Each printer has a usage meter e In simplex mode The usage meter counts only the feet of forms that are processed while printing takes place e In duplex mode The usage meter in each printer counts feet of forms anytime paper is moved through the printers The meter advances one position for every 30 48 meters 100 feet of forms that are processed through the transfer station The meter reading is used for customer billing Note The counts that are shown on these printer usage meters may not match the counts shown in Printer 1 Counter and Printer 2 Counter areas on the Printer Status window on the Display Touch Screen ATE E ANNA ANNA Do this task on the last working day of each month You need an IBM Printer Usage Sheet to report printer usage See Figure 28 onl 146 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide REFERENCE aoe METER READING REMINDER PLEASE RETURN BY E L E PLEASE RETURN TO ALL INQUIRIES SHOULD BE DIRECTED TO IBM AT IBM CORPORATION TYPE SERIAL PRIOR METER METER READING CURRENT METER REMARKS READING DATE READING SIGNATU
298. sual 41 customer alert device connecting 101 customer engineer password protection 79 D dark background 268 print 266 streaks 268 defining forms 247 deleting forms definitions 247 pre postprocessing device interface 241 print jobs 78 developer cleaning 88 90 developer inlet 20 drain hose 194 drain lever 20 21 195 drain mix inlet icon 21 inlet cover 199 message 191 mix drain hose 22 mix inlet 20 195 run 21 23 run pushbutton 20 195 305 developer continued warning message 197 developer area cleaning 90 developer inlet 20 drain 21 drain lever 20 inlet 20 mix drain hose 22 mix inlet 20 run 21 23 run pushbutton 20 toner inlet 20 toner supply pushbutton 20 developer mix 177 developer mix replacing 198 dirty prints 268 disabling a host attachment 63 display touch screen changing language 218 description 18 monitor adjusting 65 symbols and visual cues 41 timeout screen saver 40 using 33 43 using in duplex modes 33 using in simplex modes 33 Display Touch Screen windows 34 double images 267 down fold indicator and key 24 printer control panel 24 drain hose developer 194 dual simplex mode changing to 172 duplex mode changing to 172 220 E ED2 Model 3 eject to front facing page 81 ellipsis on console items 41 empty the stacker 169 enabling a host attachment 63 ES1 Model 3 ESCON channel configuration 234 Ethernet attachment configuration 237 F false end o
299. t 3000 Operator s Guide NWTO0169 Defining Forms Use this procedure to define forms You can add change or delete form definitions You must define forms to the printer before you can load them You can define forms in advance as a separate procedure You can also define forms while you are actually loading the forms The printer can store 1024 form name definitions in duplex and simplex modes and 1024 additional form name definitions for each printer in dual simplex mode for a total of 3072 form name definitions for the complete system Five form names come standard with each system and appear on the Define Forms panel on the Display Touch Screen before installation of the printer to define the foci your aristsilation i is paning to use Continue using the forms during the life of the system to add additional forms definitions Form names that are defined and stored while the printer is in duplex mode are listed and available for assignment change deletion only in duplex mode Likewise a form name that is defined and stored in either Printer 1 dual simplex or Printer 2 dual simplex mode are listed and available for assignment change deletion only when the printer is in simplex mode To define new forms or delete existing forms do the following 1 Ensure that the printer is in Not Ready status 2 SELECT the Configure pull down menu on the main Display Touch Screen window 3 SELECT the Define Forms procedure You see
300. t configuration items You may want to increase the fixed length for example if you are using a postprocessing device Two configuration parameters let you extend the NPRO length when END OF FORMS 078A is not indicated e The Pre postprocessor Extended NPRO parameter in the Confi and the Extended NPRO table item on os 1 for more information 9J and the NPRO Length table item on for more information page Note If you set the Pre postprocessor Extended NPRO item of an enabled pre postprocessor to a non zero value it takes precedence over the Configure Printer NPRO Length item regardless of the particular values specified NPRO Procedure NPRO is usable only under certain conditions which balance safety considerations with operator convenience Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 75 Requirements For NPRO To Function The following conditions must be met before NPRO can function e The printer is in a Not Ready state e Forms are loaded e The following printer conditions are not present Program Check Out of Supplies Printer Error Intervention Required except END OF FORMS 078A e A Thread Align Window does not appear e There are no errors or intervention conditions present on any preprocessing or postprocessing devices except END OF FORMS 078A You may do the following steps at the main Display Touch Screen window Consistently perform all required steps
301. t function as warranted during the warranty period IBM or your reseller will repair or replace it without charge If IBM or your reseller is unable to do so you may return it to your place of purchase and your money will be refunded If you transfer a Machine to another user warranty service is available to that user for the remainder of the warranty period You should give your proof of purchase and this Statement to that user Copyright IBM Corp 1998 xiii Warranty Service To obtain warranty service for the Machine you should contact your reseller or call IBM In the United States call IBM at 1 800 IBM SERV 426 7378 In Canada call IBM at 1 800 465 6666 You may be required to present proof of purchase Depending on the Machine the service may be 1 a Repair service at your location called On site or at one of IBM s or a reseller s service locations called Carry in or 2 an Exchange service either On site or Carry in When a type of service involves the exchange of a Machine or part the item IBM or your reseller replaces becomes its property and the replacement becomes yours The replacement may not be new but will be in good working order It is your responsibility to 1 Obtain authorization from the owner for example your lessor to have IBM or your reseller service a Machine that you do not own 2 Where applicable before service is provided a Follow the problem determination
302. t the filter container is upright in the recessed filter area Ensure that the filter cover is firmly latched in place Ensure that the filter hose is attached to the filter cover Close the rear center cover of the printer D 0l w O N To resume processing SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the main Display Touch Screen 7 If the CHECK FINE FILTER message appears again repeat steps pl through ld If that still does not correct the problem contact your service representative See for instructions 200 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Changing the Fine Filter m Attention You may leave printer power on while you perform this task but the printer should not be printing To clear this action message the printer power must be on while you replace the fine filter Do this task when you see the following message crane FINE FILTER 0791 Note You do not have to replace the fine filter the first time you see the CHANGE FINE FILTER message To bypass the message SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the main Display Touch Screen The CHANGE FINE FILTER message reappears each time end of forms is reached an error condition occurs or every 4 000 feet of forms thereafter When 100 000 additional feet of forms have been processed since the message originally appeared you must change the fine filter before you can return the printer to Ready status TE I
303. t to thread you should look for ways of splicing forms together between the printer and the postprocessing device For jam recovery in a postprocessing device see Adding Supplies The printers normally display Out of Supplies messages when an internal usage counter reaches a fixed threshold You can defer taking action on most Out of Supplies messages for some amount of additional usage During that additional usage time the Out of Supplies message reappears each time an error condition is detected or an end of forms is detected When you use a roll feed preprocessing device the printer checks the level of the supplies every 4000 feet after an initial deferred Out of Supplies message was presented The printer also displays an Out of Supplies message at that time if no end of forms or error condition is detected Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 119 120 Nonprocess Runout NPRO The Nonprocess Runout NPRO function lets you move forms from the transfer station to the stacker To add an extended length to the standard NPRO length for example if you use a postprocessing device you can do the following Increase the NPRO Length configuration item under the Configure Printer eer See 2 g 2 for more information e Increase an enabled preprocessing or postprocessing device Pre postprocessor Extended A NPRO characteristics item under the Configure Pre Post procedure for de
304. tailed infeed andr instructions about NPRO d NPRO Poe InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Recovering from a Forms Jam Simplex Operations This section describes how to clear specific simplex mode form jams All of the messages that appear and function switches you need to use are on the Display Touch Screen windows 2 X a ag A for details of jam recovery when operating the system printers in duplex printing mode Depending on how they are configured the printers can automatically reprint certain pages as part of the recovery process after some jams You must set the following Configure Printer configuration items to allow automatic reprinting following a forms jam recovery e Jam Recovery Type Must be set to one of the following Use Normal Jam Repositioning Suppress MICR Jam Repositioning and MICR postprocessing printing is not being requested e Direct Attach Must be set to No Automatic reprinting normally requests from the host and reprints the number of pages of data based on the current in effect page length for all the pages that can fit in the forms path between the transfer station and the top of the stacker at the time the jam was detected Also if a postprocessing device is used an extra number of pages can be added to the normal number of reprinted pages by setting the Jam Recovery Point Distance configuration item under the Configure Printer procedure to a non zero value This extra num
305. tem steps involving the continuous forms source or the final destination are different from the instructions given here Because each preprocessing or postprocessing device is unique you should use the specific instructions for the initial loading from a preprocessing device to the printer or forms handling in a postprocessing device following the printer that accompany the preprocessing or postprocessing device HC60G038 102 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide CAUTION lt 72 gt As you load forms be careful to avoid injuries The tractor covers are spring loaded and can pinch if they snap shut unexpectedly Moving forms especially between the transfer station and the fuser entry area can cause severe paper cuts To load forms do the following 1 Open the top and center front covers if they are not already open Tear off Print S Side N S i Print Side R4C00043 Form weights 106 g m or less more than 106 g m CAUT0102 2 Open a box of forms and place the box in the input bin against the front edge Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 103 AT THE STACKER HC60G047 3 Slide the form width handle to the farthest left position 18 on the scale 4 Turn the form length knob until two lights on the form length display indicate the correct length of the forms you are loading For example for 11 inch long forms the lig
306. tes that an enabled preprocessing or postprocessing device is showing Not Ready status on its interface PRE POSTPROCESSOR EOF PRE POSTPROCESSOR PAUS In either duplex or simplex modes this indicates that an enabled preprocessing or postprocessing device is showing End of File status on its interface ED In either duplex or simplex modes this indicates that an enabled preprocessing or postprocessing device is showing Paused status on its interface Blank No secondary status message to display Messages with System Reference Codes The following table lists all of the messages that include a system reference code There are three types of messages included Out of Supplies The message appears on the Out of Supplies window see Out Of Intervention Required The message appears on the Intervention Required window see Note All of the messages are Printer Error messages unless noted otherwise Also note that all of the following messages appear on the Printer Display Touch Screen 280 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Table 30 SRC Messages Code Message Text Type Printer Error unless noted otherwise 0104 Retractor position error 0113 Tractor motor encoder error 0114 Tractor motor overcurrent 0115 Retractor seek error 0116 Retractor motor overcurrent 0117 Form
307. th pages will print on Printer 2 Front Second means just the opposite of Front First When a postprocessing device is being used that bursts and stacks the output the Front Second setting will deliver output with the odd number pages facing to the front Front First or Front Second Verification Marks D Indicates if verification marks numbers are to be printed on the edge tractor hole area of each side of forms When these marks are printed it is possible to verify that the forms are synchronized or aligned the two sides of the form coincide The verification numbers can be read by the operator If the number on side 1 of a form matches that on side 2 then the forms are properly synchronized Multiple copies of the same page will have the same verification mark numbers Yes or No Logical Page Increment This entry allows expansion of the logical page size for cases where the printed page is larger than the valid InfoPrint 3000 printable area without errors being set This case may be encountered when a print job created for a 3800 prints too close to the page edge The value entered will increase the valid printable area by that number of pels in all directions Please review your applications to ensure that this setting does not cause loss of data such as printing on the tractor hole carrier strip that will be trimmed off Range of 0 to 20 pels Clear Memory for Security Screen Saver
308. that is closest to the Form Feed Length without exceeding it Continue SELECTING the Feed Forms pushbutton on the window for Printer 1 until the forms do not advance any further Enough forms should have moved through Printer 1 to manually thread the Buffer Flipper Unit see a details Advance the forms under Printer 2 into the input area of Printer 2 and thread Printer 2 The Feed Forms pushbutton on the window for Printer 1 becomes inoperable when a multiple of the current loaded Form Name page length that is closest to but not exceeding the length in the Length of Forms Between transfer Points configuration item shown on the Configure Printer window under the Configure pull down menu has moved through Printer 1 When the Feed Forms pushbutton and the Feed pushbutton are inoperable and additional length is needed to supply enough forms to thread Printer 2 SELECT the Printer 1 Feed Page pushbutton on the window After enough forms have moved through Printer 1 and the Buffer Flipper Unit and you have created a buffer big enough between the Buffer Flipper Unit and Printer 2 to allow you to thread Printer 2 do the following a Remove power from the Urge Unit in the Forms Input area of Printer 2 The Urge Unit cannot be threaded while the roller is moving b Thread forms through the Urge Unit c Restore power to the Urge Unit J to thread Printer 2 Visually verify that the dashed alignment mark that
309. that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM operates Any reference to an IBM product program or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM product program or service may be used Any functionally equivalent product program or service that does not infringe any of the intellectual property rights of IBM may be used instead of the IBM product program or service The evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products except those expressly designated by IBM are the responsibility of the user IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this publication The furnishing of this publication does not give you any license to these patents You can send license inquiries in writing to the IBM Director of Commercial Relations IBM Corporation Purchase NY 10577 U S A For online versions of this book we authorize you to e Copy modify and print the documentation contained on the media for use within your enterprise provided you reproduce the copyright notice all warning statements and other required statements on each copy or partial copy e Transfer the original unaltered copy of the documentation when you transfer the related IBM product which may be either machines you own or programs if the program s license terms permit a transfer You must at the same time destroy all other copies of the documentation You are respons
310. the Switch to pop up window to view the names of additional open procedures When you select a procedure the procedure window appears at the front of the cascade Operate Configure Analyze Options Help a able Atta Print Samples Switch To Switch To Print Samples Print Screen Enable Disable Attachments Traces eer i 3 Cancel Job J ext Print Cancel Help 4 Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job Figure 9 Procedure Windows in Cascade Format HC60G088 J Screen Saver Timeout When there is no user interaction or error condition on the operator console for a period of time the console goes blank Only a floating logo screen saver appears To return to the normal display simply touch the screen The screen saver timeout period length of time without user interaction before the screen saver comes on is set under the Configure Printer procedure The timeout period ranges from 0 to 60 minutes You may set different timeout periods for each printer in duplex mode and for both Printer 1 and Printer 2 in simplex mode In InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide dual simplex mode if you make different settings for Printer 1 and Printer 2 the shortest of the two settings is used by both printers Symbols and Visual Cues The Display Touch Screen windows contain several symbols that act as visual cues
311. the job at the point where the output was lost e Restart the entire job Jams Within the Printer Engine Do this task when a Printer Error Display Touch Screen window shows one of the messages that are listed in able 12 on page 174 All of the messages apply to all printer models unless otherwise noted 122 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Important following To clear the jam message from the Display Touch Screen window do the e For STACKER JAM 161 and STACKER JAM 164 you must open and close the stacker gate or you must lower and raise the stacker table e For the jam messages in the following list SELECT the Check Reset pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen UPPER TRACTOR FORMS JAM 0119 TENSION ARM DOWN 0131 TENSION ARM UP 0132 SKEW ERROR 0133 FUSER WRAP 0134 Jam Recovery Procedures Table 12 Jam Recovery Procedures Simplex Mode Error Message SRC Code In Numeric Order Recovery Actions UPPER TRACTOR FORMS JAM 0119 TENSION ARM DOWN 0131 TENSION ARM UP 0132 SKEW ERROR 0133 FUSER WRAP 0134 Forms are jammed torn or separated 1 2 Clear the forms path See If any of the Printer Error messages still appear SELECT the Check Reset pushbutton on the Printer Error Display Touch Screen window Check for and resolve or postpone any other error or intervention message appearing on the Display Touch Screen windows Reload the forms See SELECT the Ready pushbutto
312. the total physical width by including the 0 5 inch tractor hole carrier strips on both sides of the form For Models ED1 ED2 the following form widths are allowed e Dual Simplex Mode 204 to 457 mm 8 0 to 18 0 in e Duplex Mode 229 to 457 mm 9 0 to 18 0 in For Model ES1 the following form widths are allowed 204 to 457 mm 8 0 to 18 0 in Specify the width in millimeters or inches If you use millimeters do not use a decimal point If you use inches fractions must use a decimal point enter 13 as 13 5 2 For length specify the length of the form in the process direction parallel to the tractor holes You can specify length in millimeters or inches and in lengths from 77 to 432 mm 3 to 17 in Specify the length either in inches to two decimal places or in millimeters as a whole number The printer rounds the length you enter to the nearest one sixth inch and displays it on the screen For related information see 250 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Duplex Configuration Worksheet Table 24 Configuration Worksheet Duplex Models Item Available Values Selected Values Duplex Dual Simplex Printer 1 Printer 2 MESSAGE DISPLAY LANGUAGE e US English e Spanish e French e German e Japanese e Italian e Brazilian Portuguese e Chinese Simplified e Chinese Traditional PRINTER CONFIGURATION Printer Mode Duplex Simplex Auto Start Yes No PQE boldn
313. then reloads the control unit internal code This resets pointers counters and other controls In duplex mode the complete system both printers undergoes a Restart In simplex or dual simplex mode the Restart applies only to the printer you are restarting You can still use the other printer See Sh for more information 46 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Configure Pull Down Menu Figure 12 shows the selections available on the Configure pull down menu Note If the printer is not stopped some items are grayed out Operate Configure Analyze Options Define Forms Configure Printer Configure Attachments Configure Pre Post Adjust Print Remote Access Ready Check Reset NPRO Cancel Job Figure 12 Configure Pull Down Menu HC60G093 Define Forms Lets you change add and delete form definitions You must define a form before yon can assign and load it on a printer See for more information Configure Printer Lets you display update or print out a copy of the printer configuration Configure Attachments Lets you display attachments See information Configure Pre Post Lets you add delete or change the specifications of preprocessing or n for more information Adjust Print Shifts the logical page on a form when you are using preprinted forms or other forms that require precise alignm
314. tion switches do not respond when pressed The printers keep only potentially valid controls hardware switches and Display Touch Screen pushbuttons active while operating For example when the Display Touch Screen shows READY only the Stop function is active You must stop the printer before using any other functions If a function key should be active but is not use the Se 3 ocedure to contact your service representative The alarm is sounding The audible alarm tone should sound whenever an interruption message appears in a Display Touch Screen window The intervention light on top of the printer comes on at the same time e SELECT the Check Reset pushbutton on the interruption window to contact your e If the alarm continues use the all Procedure on page 14 service representative Chapter 9 Print Quality and Problem Solving 269 Table 28 Miscellaneous Problems continued Symptom Discussion Suggested Action The intervention light on top of the printer comes on but the alarm does not sound Labels stick together in the stacker Toner from one page sticks to the facing page The alarm volume may be set to a low volume or alarm suppression may be set to Yes in the printer configuration Labels must be processed in simplex mode Adjust the alarm volume control see e Set the Forms Select switch on the stacker control panel to Plastic e Redu
315. to thread Printer 2 Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 161 8 Visually verify that the dashed alignment mark that is printed on Printer 1 is aligned to the alignment mark on the input station on Printer 2 a If the alignment mark is aligned at Printer 2 check to see if there is a sufficient buffer loop of forms between Printer 1 and the Buffer Flipper Unit If you need to increase the buffer loop change the Length of Forms Between Transfer Points printer configuration item See the table item on page for more information b If the Printer 1 alignment mark is short of the appropriate forms length scale mark in Printer 2 SELECT the Printer 2 Feed Page pushbutton as many times as necessary until the Printer 1 alignment mark is aligned at Printer 2 c If the Printer 1 alignment mark is past the forms length scale mark in printer 2 first add some more buffer loop between Printer 1 and the Buffer Flipper Unit Do this by SELECTING the Printer 1 Feed Page pushbutton several times and then SELECTING the Cancel pushbutton on the window You must now restart this Thread Align Forms procedure 9 After you have visually verified that the Printer 1 alignment mark is aligned correctly on Printer 2 SELECT the Mark is Aligned pushbutton on the window At the Verification window SELECT the OK pushbutton This informs the control unit that the alignment is complete m Important If your visual verification of alignment is inc
316. tor alert assembly e Power control panel e System interconnection electronics e Preprocessing postprocessing device interfaces PSE Print Services Facility R RAM Random access memory raster 1 In computer graphics a predetermined pattern of lines that provides uniform coverage of a display space 2 The coordinate grid that divides the display area of a display device 3 In the InfoPrint 3000 Printer Subsystem an on off pattern of electrostatic images produced by the laser print head under control of the character generator raster pattern A series of picture elements pels arranged in scan lines to form an image registration In printing refers to the relative print positions of images that are printed at different times For example when you process preprinted forms the registration is good if the new image printed by the InfoPrint 3000 aligns correctly with the preprinted image Print that extends beyond box edges and text that overlaps other text are examples of poor registration resource 1 People equipment or material used to perform a task or a project 2 Any facility of a computing system or operating system required by a job or task including main storage input output I O devices processing units data sets and controller processing programs for example page printers use resources such as form definitions page definitions and fonts reverse heading A heading where each character is h
317. toring supplies 178 streaks white 267 supplies adding 119 customer replaceable items 177 developer mix 177 fine filter 177 fuser oil 177 maintenance items 177 oiler belt 177 ordering 177 replacing 175 storing 178 suggested quantities 176 toner 177 toner collector 177 warranty return 178 worksheet 176 switches power 18 56 switching print resolution 174 switching printer modes dual simplex duplex 172 symbol system menu 39 symbols console 41 symptom table print quality 266 255 symptoms alarm does not sound 270 any other problem 268 auto load jams 269 blank areas 267 blank Display Touch Screen display 269 dark background 268 dark print 266 dark streaks 268 dirty prints 268 double images 267 false end of forms 270 forms moving at irregular speed 270 frequent stops and starts 270 function keys not responding 269 light areas 267 print 267 light areas 267 light print 267 message displayed too long 269 poor registration 267 print bloom 268 print rubs off 267 printer does not respond to controlling computer system 270 repeating message 269 repeating spot patterns 266 voids 267 white streaks 267 wide characters 266 system characteristics 1 system configurations and usage dual simplex 8 duplex printing applications 4 inline 6 left angle 7 8 simplex printing 5 system components 3 ED1 Model 3 system menu symbol 39 system menu symbol 41 system power controlling 56 60 7 TABLE switch 29 thread al
318. trols ee eee 18 20 22 23 25 26 26 27 28 30 31 32 33 33 34 35 37 37 37 37 38 38 39 39 39 40 41 43 45 47 49 50 52 53 55 56 57 57 60 61 61 62 63 63 63 65 65 On Screen Display Controls Adjusting the Print Position F Adjusting the Volume of the Operator Alert Assembly Advancing Forms Using the NPRO and NPRO Page Functions NPRO Procedure NPRO Page Procedure Canceling a Job Changing the Password or Authorization Level Checking for a Front Facing Page Checking the Forms Alignment Checking Print Quality Cleaning the Oiler Belt Cleaning the Printer Connecting an Accessory to the Operator Alert Contacts Loading Forms Simplex or Dual Simplex Mode Loading Forms Duplex Mode Adjusting the Stacker Table Height Preprocessing and Postprocessing Instructions Powering On and Off Pre Post Devices Enabling Disabling Pre Post Interfaces Using the Printer Stacker Error and Jam Recovery Adding Supplies Nonprocess Runout NPRO Recovering from a Forms Jam Simplex Operations Jams Within the Printer Engine Jam Recovery Procedures Jams Between the Printer and a Postprocessing Device Recovering from a Forms Jam Duplex Operations 129 131 134 Jams Between the Printer and a Postprocessing 134 Jams Within Printer 1 Jams Within Printer 2 Jam Between Printer 1 and Printer 2 Device Recovering from a Forms Jam in
319. ts you view print or change the configuration settings of an installed attachment Note The printer can have multiple sets of configuration data one for each mode in which the printer can operate To update a configuration for a particular mode the printer must be running in that mode for example Duplex mode The following host attachments are available Parallel Channel ESCON Channel Token Ring TCP IP Ethernet TCP IP FDDI TCP IP for Models ED1 ED2 only Before you change a configuration value please review the configuration information table for the attachment configuration you are changing information You do not m to disable attachments if vou are viewing or changing the configuration To access the configuration settings do one of the following e In duplex mode SELECT the Configure pull down menu on the main Display Touch Screen window e In dual simplex mode SELECT the Configure pull down menu on the Display Touch Screen window of the printer with which you want to work SELECT the Configure Attachments procedure You see the Configure Attachments window This window lists the attachments that are currently installed It also lists the attachments that are not installed but are present in the control unit and could be installed Chapter 8 Configuring the System 229 Operate Configure Analyze Options Configure Attachments Select an Attachment D Paral
320. ttachment Items ESCON Channel Attachment Items Token Ring TCP IP Attachment Items Ethernet TCP IP Attachment Items FDDI TCP IP Attachment Items Preprocessing Postprocessing Interface Options Pre Postprocessor Device Configuration Items Configuration Workahext Duplex Models Configuration Worksheet Simplex Model Form Identification Worksheet Print Quality Symptom Table Miscellaneous Problems Printer Status Window Status Field Messages SRC Messages Examples of Some Valid Form Lengths i in Inches 232 234 235 237 239 241 243 251 258 264 266 269 279 281 291 xi xii InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Statement of Limited Warranty The warranties provided by IBM in this Statement of Limited Warranty apply only to Machines you originally purchase for your use and not for resale from IBM or an IBM authorized reseller The term Machine means an IBM machine its features conversions upgrades elements or accessories or any combination of them Machines are subject to these terms only if purchased in the United States or Puerto Rico or Canada and located in the country of purchase If you have any questions contact IBM or your reseller Machine InfoPrint 3000 Warranty Period 90 days Elements and accessories are warranted for three months Contact your place of purchase for warranty service information Production Status Each Machine is manuf
321. tterns 266 replacing absorbent pad in oil pan 212 developer mix 191 fine filter 201 oiler belt 204 toner collector 188 report printer use 146 reservoir oil 180 181 responding to messages 271 291 restarting the system 61 Reverse forms feed key 24 right fold printer control panel 24 RMI Remote Management Interface 245 RPQs 51 run traces 148 S screen saver timeout 40 scroll bar 38 41 scroll box 41 Select Medium Modification SMM 255 256 257 260 261 262 selectable field 41 selectable fields 37 Service Actions Analyze procedure 49 308 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide service call procedure 13 service clearances 293 service representative password protection 79 setting print positions horizontal 72 vertical 73 shutting down the system 61 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 245 simplex mode changing to 220 SMM Select Medium Modification 256 257 260 261 262 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 245 soft program check messages 272 Special features 51 spout oil 180 stacker area 27 140 143 cleaning 88 control panel 27 control panel Forms Feed 29 control panel FORMS WIDTH lever 30 control panel TABLE switch 29 FORMS LENGTH knob 30 gate 27 170 message 169 panel 27 table 27 171 table switches 169 unloading 169 static brush 25 static discharge brush cleaning 93 status not ready 12 ready 11 status messages 278 Stop Main Window pushbutton 34 Stop Operate procedure 45 s
322. u InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Limitation of Liability Circumstances may arise where because of a default on IBM s part including fundamental breach or other liability including negligence and misrepresentation you are entitled to recover damages from IBM In each such instance regardless of the basis on which you are entitled to claim damages IBM is liable only for 1 Bodily injury including death and damage to real property and tangible personal property and 2 The amount of any other actual loss or damage up to the greater of 100 000 or the charge for the Machine that is the subject of the claim Under no circumstances is IBM liable for any of the following 1 Third party claims against you for losses or damages other than those under the first item listed above 2 Loss of or damage to your records or data or 3 Economic consequential damages including lost profits or savings or incidental damages even if IBM is informed of their possibility Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction Statement of Limited Warranty XV Xvi InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Notices References in this publication to IBM products programs or services do not imply
323. upplies Messages Out of Supplies messages specify an operator task that needs to be done involving printer supplies ise al shows a sample Out of Supplies window Figure 40 Out of Supplies Window This window contains the following e The name of the supply and the action that is required e An indication of which printer needs attention e A step by step procedure to follow e Function pushbuttons Check Reset Informs the control unit that you have completed all actions necessary to replenish the supply item For supply actions that may be postponed this pushbutton allows you to postpone the action and place the printer back into Ready status Help Displays help information Notes e You may be able to temporarily postpone replacing some of the supplies such as the fuser oil developer mix and fine filter You must replace occurs See aL more information e All Out of Supplies messages appear in the printer Display Touch Screen area for the printer on which the error occurred See able 30 on page 281 for a list of all messages of this type 276 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Intervention Required Messages Intervention Required messages specify an operator task that you need to do shows a sample Intervention Required window Operate Configure Analyze Options Intervention Required Intervention Stacker full Code 0796 Printer 2
324. value options for each item The factory set default values are underlined Table 18 ESCON Channel Attachment Items Configuration Item Description Value Options ESCON Link A Specifies if ESCON Channel Link A is installed Yes or No Installed ESCON Link B Specifies if ESCON Channel Link B is installed Yes or No Installed Device Address Specifies the 2 digit hexadecimal channel address which includes the device address Notes 1 In simplex mode only one device address is required 2 In dual simplex mode each printer requires a unique device address Printer 1 requires an even number for example X 30 Printer 2 requires the next consecutive number for example X 31 3 The duplex system does not require a unique number It can use either of the addresses used for dual simplex Printer 1 or dual simplex Printer 2 However it is often easier from an operational viewpoint to assign duplex a separate address so the duplex and simplex printers look like unique devices to the operating system The general convention in this case is to assign the duplex system the next consecutive address even after the address for simplex Printer 2 For example if you define Printer 1 in dual simplex as X 30 you should then define Printer 2 in dual simplex as X 31 and optionally define the complete system in duplex as X 32 4 The device addresses specified above must match the device addresses defined to the
325. verlay See electronic overlay Overlay Generation Language 370 OGL 370 The licensed program that is used to create electronic overlays P page A printed form See also logical page and physical page page definition PAGEDEF A statement that specifies attributes of a logical page such as the width of its margins and the orientation of text page perforation The perforation that defines the page of a form It may or may not be at a fold in the form A form may have several pages between each fold See also fold perforation page printer A device that prints one page as a unit Contrast with line printer Page Printer Formatting Aid PPFA A licensed program that creates form definitions FORMDEFs and page definitions PAGEDEFs pallet A portable platform for handling storing or moving materials paper break A separation either at a perforation or from a tear of the continuous forms paper paper path The entire route that forms travel while they are being processed The paper path usually begins where the forms are loaded and ends at the stacker Because not all forms are paper the term forms path is preferred parallel channel A channel having a System 360 or System 370 channel to control unit interface that uses bus and tag cables as a transmission medium Contrast with ESCON channel parameter A variable that is given a constant value for a specified application and that may denote the applicati
326. xed length of forms through both Printer 1 and Printer 2 The fixed length is based on the Length of Forms Between Transfer Points configuration item length that is shown on the Configure Printer window under the Configure pull down menu It is a multiple of the current loaded Form Name page length that is closest to the Length of Forms Between Transfer Points length without exceeding it n Visually verify that the dashed alignment mark that is printed on Printer 1 is aligned to the appropriate alignment mark on the input station on Printer 2 a Ifthe alignment mark is aligned at Printer 2 check to see if there is a sufficient buffer loop of forms between Printer 1 and the Buffer Flipper Unit If the buffer loop needs to be increased change the Length of Forms Between Transfer Points printer configuration item See the table item on page p23 for more information b If the Printer 1 alignment mark is short of the alignment mark in Printer 2 SELECT the Printer 2 Feed Page pushbutton on Printer 2 as many times as necessary until the Printer 1 alignment mark is aligned at Printer 2 c If the Printer 1 alignment mark is past the alignment mark in printer 2 first add some more buffer loop between Printer 1 and the Buffer Flipper Unit by SELECTING the Printer 1 Feed Page pushbutton several times Then SELECT the Cancel pushbutton on the window Chapter 6 Operator Responsibilities 155 You must now restart this Thread Align
327. you do the following a Use the Forms Feed switches on the printer control panel to align the form perforation of the first full page with the correct length alignment mark on the rear tractor cover See age 14d for details b SELECT the Table Up pushbutton on the stacker control panel to make the forms taut If any of the Printer Error messages are still displayed SELECT the Check Reset pushbutton on the Printer Error Display Touch Screen window Check for and resolve or postpone any other error or intervention message appearing on the Display Touch Screen windows Check to ensure that the perforation is aligned at the correct forms length of the tractor station alignment scale and adjust if necessary SELECT the Ready pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen window If reprinting is allowed all unfused pages between the transfer station and the top of the stacker plus any jam recovery point distance defined in the printer configuration are reprinted Check for and discard duplicate pages If reprinting is not allowed work with the host system console operator to recover the lost pages gg H if the error recurs frequently 124 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide Table 12 Jam Recovery Procedures Simplex Mode continued Error Message SRC Code In Numeric Order STACKER FORMS JAM 0161 STACKER FORMS JAM 0164 These errors are not set when a Postprocessing Device Interface feature is inst
328. you finish adding toner and the following message appears with the ADD TONER message or when this message appears alone chance TONER COLLECTOR 0785 You need the following items when you change the toner collector e New toner collector bag e Paper towels Operator Tips e You may want to spread papers on the floor near the toner collector to catch spills If you get toner on your hands gently brush or blow it off and avoid touching your eyes or mouth e If you get toner on your clothes gently brush or blow it off If that does not remove all of the toner wash the clothes with cold water Hot water and hot process dry cleaning will cause the toner to fuse to the fabric 1 Press the Stop pushbutton on the Display Touch Screen 188 InfoPrint 3000 Operator s Guide i AA ee i TN p HC60G031 Open the rear center cover Lift the latch and remove the ring from the hook on the handle of the toner collector case Pull the toner collector case straight out Apply the adhesive seal that is supplied with the toner over the opening of the used toner collector bag Remove the bag from the toner collector case carefully to avoid spilling the waste toner Discard the bag Grasp the bottom of a new toner collector bag and expand it Insert the tabs under the lip at the top of the bag Chapter 7 Ordering

IBM 3000 Printer User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents